UA5000 Hardware Description Manual

Chapter 1 Overview 1-1.........................................................................................

1.1 About the UA5000 1-1..................................................................................1.2 Configuration of the UA5000 1-2..................................................................

Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames 2-1....................................................

2.1 HABA Frame 2-1..........................................................................................2.1.1 Overview 2-1........................................................................................2.1.2 Layout 2-1............................................................................................2.1.3 External Port 2-3..................................................................................

2.2 HABB Frame 2-4..........................................................................................2.2.1 Overview 2-4........................................................................................2.2.2 Layout 2-5............................................................................................2.2.3 External Port 2-6..................................................................................

2.3 HABD Frame 2-7..........................................................................................2.3.1 Overview 2-7........................................................................................2.3.2 Layout 2-8............................................................................................2.3.3 External Port 2-9..................................................................................

2.4 HABE Frame 2-12..........................................................................................2.4.1 Overview 2-12........................................................................................2.4.2 Layout 2-12............................................................................................2.4.3 External Port 2-13..................................................................................

2.5 HABF Frame 2-15..........................................................................................2.5.1 Overview 2-15........................................................................................2.5.2 Layout 2-15............................................................................................2.5.3 External Port 2-16..................................................................................

2.6 HABL Frame 2-18...........................................................................................2.6.1 Overview 2-18........................................................................................2.6.2 Layout 2-19............................................................................................2.6.3 External Port 2-20..................................................................................

Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards 3-1.....................................................................

3.1 About This Chapter 3-1................................................................................3.2 ATM Service Processing Card-H601APMB 3-1...........................................

3.2.1 Overview 3-1........................................................................................3.2.2 Front Panel 3-1....................................................................................3.2.3 Subcard 3-3..........................................................................................3.2.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-10.............................

3.3 Broadband Control Card of the Slave Frame-H601APSB 3-11......................3.3.1 Overview 3-11........................................................................................3.3.2 Front Panel 3-11....................................................................................

3.4 IP Service Processing Card-H601IPMB 3-13.................................................

3.4.1 Overview 3-13........................................................................................3.4.2 Front Panel 3-14....................................................................................3.4.3 Subcard 3-16..........................................................................................3.4.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-17.............................

3.5 Packet Voice Processing Card- AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB 3-18.........................................................................

3.5.1 Overview 3-18........................................................................................3.5.2 Front Panel 3-19....................................................................................3.5.3 Jumpers 3-21.........................................................................................3.5.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-22.............................

3.6 Packet Voice Processing Card -H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG 3-23....................................................

3.6.1 Overview 3-23........................................................................................3.6.2 Front Panel 3-24....................................................................................3.6.3 Jumpers 3-27.........................................................................................3.6.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-28.............................

3.7 V5 Interface Processing Unit-H601PVU8/H601PVU4 3-29............................3.7.1 Overview 3-29........................................................................................3.7.2 Front Panel 3-30....................................................................................3.7.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-33............................................................3.7.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-34.............................

3.8 Remote Subscriber Processing Card- H601RSU8/ H601RSU4 3-35............3.8.1 Overview 3-35........................................................................................3.8.2 Front Panel 3-36....................................................................................3.8.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-38............................................................3.8.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-40.............................

3.9 Remote Subscriber Processing Card-H602RSUG ( 2G. SHDSL) 3-41..........3.9.1 Overview 3-41........................................................................................3.9.2 Front Panel 3-41....................................................................................3.9.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-43.............................

3.10 ATM Port Card-H601AIUB 3-45...................................................................3.10.1 Overview 3-45......................................................................................3.10.2 Front Panel 3-45..................................................................................3.10.3 Subcard 3-47........................................................................................3.10.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-48...........................

3.11 16-Port E1 Port Card-H601EDTB 3-50........................................................3.11.1 Overview 3-50......................................................................................3.11.2 Front Panel 3-50..................................................................................3.11.3 Jumpers 3-51.......................................................................................3.11.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-54...........................

3.12 16-Port ADSL Line Card-H601ADLB 3-56...................................................

3.12.1 Overview 3-56......................................................................................3.12.2 Front Panel 3-56..................................................................................3.12.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-57..........................................................3.12.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-58...........................

3.13 16-Port ADSL Line Card-H601ADLF 3-59....................................................3.13.1 Overview 3-59......................................................................................3.13.2 Front Panel 3-59..................................................................................3.13.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-60..........................................................3.13.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-61...........................

3.14 16-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card -H602ADMB/ H602ADMC/H602ADMI 3-62....................................................................................................

3.14.1 Overview 3-62......................................................................................3.14.2 Front Panel 3-62..................................................................................3.14.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-63...........................

3.15 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card-H603ADRB 3-64....................................3.15.1 Overview 3-64......................................................................................3.15.2 Front Panel 3-64..................................................................................3.15.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-65..........................................................3.15.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-66...........................

3.16 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card-H605ADRB 3-68....................................3.16.1 Overview 3-68......................................................................................3.16.2 Front Panel 3-68..................................................................................3.16.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-69..........................................................3.16.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-70...........................

3.17 16-Port Analog Line Card-CB36ASL/CB37ASL 3-72...................................3.17.1 Overview 3-72......................................................................................3.17.2 Front Panel 3-73..................................................................................3.17.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-73...........................

3.18 16-Port Analog Line Card-CB38ASL 3-75....................................................3.18.1 Overview 3-75......................................................................................3.18.2 Front Panel 3-76..................................................................................3.18.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-76...........................

3.19 32-Port Analog Line Card- CC0HASL/ CC0NASL/CC0RASL 3-78..............3.19.1 Overview 3-78......................................................................................3.19.2 Front Panel 3-79..................................................................................3.19.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-79...........................

3.20 16-Port Analog Line Card-CC0KASL/CC0MASL 3-81.................................3.20.1 Overview 3-81......................................................................................3.20.2 Front Panel 3-82..................................................................................3.20.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-82...........................

3.21 6-Port 2/4-Wire E&M Port Card-H601ATIA 3-84..........................................


3.22 16-Port Direct Dial-in Subscriber Port Card - H301CDI/ CC01CDI 3-90......3.22.1 Overview 3-90......................................................................................3.22.2 Front Panel 3-90..................................................................................3.22.3 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane 3-91............................

3.23 16-port POTS and ADSL Combo Line Card-H601CSLB 3-93.....................3.23.1 Overview 3-93......................................................................................3.23.2 Front Panel 3-93..................................................................................3.23.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-93..........................................................3.23.4 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane 3-94............................

3.24 16-Port POTS and ADSL Combo Line Card-H601CSLI 3-96......................3.24.1 Overview 3-96......................................................................................3.24.2 Front Panel 3-96..................................................................................3.24.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-97..........................................................3.24.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-98...........................

3.25 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card¨CH602CSMB... 3-993.25.1 Overview 3-99......................................................................................3.25.2 Front Panel 3-99..................................................................................3.25.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-100..........................................................3.25.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-100...........................

3.26 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card -H603CSMB/ H603CSMC 3-102.............................................................................


3.27 32-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card - H603CSRB 3-106....3.27.1 Overview 3-106......................................................................................3.27.2 Front Panel 3-106..................................................................................3.27.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-107..........................................................3.27.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-108...........................

3.28 16-Port Circuit Emulation E1 Port Card-H601DEHA 3-109............................3.28.1 Overview 3-109......................................................................................3.28.2 Front Panel 3-110..................................................................................3.28.3 DIP Switches 3-110................................................................................3.28.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-112...........................

3.29 8-Port Digital Line Card-CB02DSL/CB03DSL 3-114......................................3.29.1 Overview 3-114......................................................................................

3.29.2 Front Panel 3-114..................................................................................3.29.3 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane 3-116............................

3.30 8-Port Digital Subscriber Line Card-CB05DSL 3-117.....................................3.30.1 Overview 3-117......................................................................................3.30.2 Front Panel 3-117..................................................................................3.30.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-119...........................

3.31 8-Port Ethernet Access Unit Card-H601EAUA 3-120.....................................3.31.1 Overview 3-120......................................................................................3.31.2 Front Panel 3-120..................................................................................3.31.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-121...........................

3.32 2-Port High Speed Line Card-H302HSL 3-123..............................................3.32.1 Overview 3-123......................................................................................3.32.2 Front Panel 3-124..................................................................................3.32.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-125..........................................................3.32.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-126...........................

3.33 2-Port High Speed Line Card-H303HSL 3-127..............................................3.33.1 Overview 3-127......................................................................................3.33.2 Front Panel 3-127..................................................................................3.33.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-129..........................................................3.33.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-130...........................

3.34 4-Port SHDSL and 4-Port E1 Card-H521SDL 3-132......................................3.34.1 Overview 3-132......................................................................................3.34.2 Front Panel 3-133..................................................................................3.34.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-134..........................................................3.34.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-136...........................

3.35 16-Port SHDSL Line Card-H601SDLB 3-138.................................................3.35.1 Overview 3-138......................................................................................3.35.2 Front Panel 3-138..................................................................................3.35.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-139...........................

3.36 8-Port SHDSL Line Card-H601SDLT 3-140...................................................3.36.1 Overview 3-140......................................................................................3.36.2 Front Panel 3-141..................................................................................3.36.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-142...........................

3.37 16-Port VDSL Line Card-H601VDLA 3-143...................................................3.37.1 Overview 3-143......................................................................................3.37.2 Front Panel 3-143..................................................................................3.37.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-144...........................

3.38 16-Port VDSL Line Card-H601VDLB 3-145...................................................3.38.1 Overview 3-145......................................................................................3.38.2 Front Panel 3-145..................................................................................3.38.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-146...........................

3.39 16-Port Voice Frequency Port Card-CB02VFB 3-147....................................3.39.1 Overview 3-147......................................................................................3.39.2 Front Panel 3-147..................................................................................3.39.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-148..........................................................3.39.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-149...........................

3.40 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Port Card-CB03VFB 3-151....................3.40.1 Overview 3-151......................................................................................3.40.2 Front Panel 3-151..................................................................................3.40.3 DIP Switches 3-152................................................................................3.40.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-153...........................

3.41 16-port Message LED Analog Line Card-CB01VMS 3-155............................3.41.1 Overview 3-155......................................................................................3.41.2 Front Panel 3-156..................................................................................3.41.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-156...........................

3.42 Environment & Power Monitoring Card-H303ESC 3-158...............................3.42.1 Overview 3-158......................................................................................3.42.2 Front Panel 3-159..................................................................................3.42.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-159..........................................................

3.43 Environment & Power Monitoring Card-H304ESC 3-161...............................3.43.1 Overview 3-161......................................................................................3.43.2 Front Panel 3-162..................................................................................3.43.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-162..........................................................

3.44 Fan Control Card-H601FCB 3-164.................................................................3.44.1 Overview 3-164......................................................................................3.44.2 Front Panel 3-164..................................................................................3.44.3 DIP Switches 3-165................................................................................

3.45 Remote Power Supply Monitoring Card-H611PWMA 3-166..........................3.45.1 Overview 3-166......................................................................................3.45.2 Front Panel 3-166..................................................................................

3.46 Secondary Power Supply Card-H602PWX0 3-168........................................3.46.1 Overview 3-168......................................................................................3.46.2 Front Panel 3-169..................................................................................3.46.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers 3-170..........................................................

3.47 Secondary Power Supply Card-H602PWX2 3-171........................................3.47.1 Overview 3-171......................................................................................3.47.2 Front Panel 3-172..................................................................................3.47.3 Jumpers 3-173.......................................................................................

3.48 Subscriber Test Card-H601TSSB/H601TSSC 3-175.....................................3.48.1 Overview 3-175......................................................................................3.48.2 Front Panel 3-176..................................................................................3.48.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-178...........................

3.49 Rear Access E1 Conversion Card-H601E1TB 3-181.....................................3.49.1 Overview 3-181......................................................................................3.49.2 Front Panel 3-181..................................................................................3.49.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-182...........................

3.50 Front Access E1 Conversion Card-H601E1TF 3-184....................................3.50.1 Overview 3-184......................................................................................3.50.2 Front Panel 3-184..................................................................................

3.51 Rear Access FE Conversion Card-H601EFTB 3-185....................................3.51.1 Overview 3-185......................................................................................3.51.2 Front Panel 3-186..................................................................................3.51.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-187...........................

3.52 Front Access E1/FE Conversion Card-H601EFTF 3-188...............................3.52.1 Overview 3-188......................................................................................3.52.2 Front Panel 3-188..................................................................................

3.53 High Speed Link Conversion Card from Front Access MasterFrame to Extended Frame- H601HLAF 3-190.......................................................

3.53.1 Overview 3-190......................................................................................3.53.2 Front Panel 3-191..................................................................................

3.54 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access ExtendedFrame - H601HLEF 3-191......................................................................................


3.55 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access Slave Frame -H601HLSF 3-192....................................................................................................


3.56 Rear Access HW Conversion Card of Master Frame - H601HWCB 3-192....3.56.1 Overview 3-192......................................................................................3.56.2 Front Panel 3-192..................................................................................

3.57 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Master Frame - H601HWCF 3-194...3.57.1 Overview 3-194......................................................................................3.57.2 Front Panel 3-194..................................................................................

3.58 HW Conversion Card of Rear Access Slave Frame-H601HWTB 3-195........3.58.1 Overview 3-195......................................................................................3.58.2 Front Panel 3-195..................................................................................

3.59 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Extended Frame -H601HWTF 3-196..................................................................................................


3.60 32-Port Relay Rear Access Conversion Card-H601RATB 3-197...................3.60.1 Overview 3-197......................................................................................3.60.2 Front Panel 3-198..................................................................................

3.60.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-198...........................3.61 32-Port Front Access Relay Conversion Card¨CH601RATF............... 3-200

3.61.1 Overview 3-200......................................................................................3.61.2 Front Panel 3-201..................................................................................3.61.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane 3-202...........................

3.62 Front Access Subscriber Cable Conversion Card - H601SLTF 3-203...........3.62.1 Overview 3-203......................................................................................3.62.2 Front Panel 3-204..................................................................................

Chapter 4 Introduction to Front-Access Cables 4-1...........................................

4.1 About This Chapter 4-1................................................................................4.2 Trunk Cable 4-1............................................................................................

4.2.1 Overview of Trunk Cable 4-1...............................................................4.2.2 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 4-1......4.2.3 75-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 4-1........................4.2.4 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 4-5...........4.2.5 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 4-8..........................4.2.6 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 4-8.................................4.2.7 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 4-11...............................4.2.8 E3/T3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 4-14.........................................4.2.9 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 4-16...............4.2.10 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 4-17....4.2.11 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000SS42SP2 4-21................................................................................................4.2.12 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 4-24....4.2.13 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000SS42SP2 4-28................................................................................................4.2.14 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF 4-31......4.2.15 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF 4-31.............4.2.16 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF 4-33...........4.2.17 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF 4-35......4.2.18 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF 4-35.............4.2.19 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF 4-38...........4.2.20 IPMB FE Upstream Cable 4-40............................................................4.2.21 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toAPMB 4-40......................................................................................................4.2.22 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toAPMB 4-40......................................................................................................4.2.23 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toAPMB 4-43......................................................................................................4.2.24 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toDDF 4-46.........................................................................................................4.2.25 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF 4-46...................

4.2.26 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4to Metro 1000 4-46..........................................................................................4.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 4-47...

4.3 Subtending Cable 4-47...................................................................................4.3.1 Overview of Subtending Cable 4-47......................................................4.3.2 HW Cable 4-47.......................................................................................4.3.3 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame 4-49...................................................4.3.4 LVDS Cable for the Extended Frame 4-51............................................

4.4 Subscriber Cable 4-53....................................................................................4.4.1 Overview of Subscriber Cable 4-53.......................................................4.4.2 16-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable 4-53......................................4.4.3 32-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable 4-56......................................4.4.4 ATIA Subscriber Cable 4-59..................................................................4.4.5 EAUA Subscriber Cable 4-62.................................................................

4.5 Maintenance Cable 4-64................................................................................4.5.1 Overview of Maintenance Cable 4-64....................................................4.5.2 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable 4-64.............................................4.5.3 Overview of Network Cable 4-65...........................................................4.5.4 Straight Through Cable 4-66..................................................................4.5.5 Cross Over Cable 4-66..........................................................................

4.6 Signal Cable 4-67...........................................................................................4.6.1 Test and Alarm Cable 4-67....................................................................4.6.2 Test and Alarm Subtending Cable 4-69.................................................

4.7 Optical Fiber 4-71...........................................................................................4.7.1 Optical Fiber Type 4-71..........................................................................4.7.2 Fiber Selection Criteria 4-73..................................................................4.7.3 Optical Port Connector 4-74...................................................................

Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear-Access Cables 5-1............................................

5.1 About This Chapter 5-1................................................................................5.2 Trunk Cable 5-1............................................................................................

5.2.1 Overview of Trunk Cable 5-1...............................................................5.2.2 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 5-1..........................5.2.3 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 5-2.................................5.2.4 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 5-4...............................5.2.5 Overview of E3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 5-7..........................5.2.6 75-ohm E3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 5-7.................................5.2.7 120-ohm E3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF 5-9...............................5.2.8 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 5-10...............5.2.9 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 5-10......

5.2.10 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000SS42SP1 5-14................................................................................................5.2.11 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 5-18....5.2.12 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000SS42SP2 5-21................................................................................................5.2.13 E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 5-25........................5.2.14 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 5-25...........5.2.15 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF 5-27.........5.2.16 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF 5-29..........................5.2.17 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 5-29........5.2.18 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000SS42SP1 5-30................................................................................................5.2.19 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000SS42SP1 5-32................................................................................................5.2.20 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000SS42SP2 5-34................................................................................................5.2.21 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000SS42SP2 5-36................................................................................................5.2.22 IPMB Service Subtending Cable 5-38..................................................5.2.23 IPMB Upstream Cable 5-41.................................................................5.2.24 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4to APMB 5-41..................................................................................................5.2.25 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toAPMB 5-41......................................................................................................5.2.26 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toAPMB 5-44......................................................................................................5.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF 5-47.............5.2.28 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 5-47...5.2.29 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toMetro 1000 SS42SP1 5-47.............................................................................5.2.30 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toMetro 1000 SS42SP1 5-50.............................................................................5.2.31 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toMetro 1000 SS42SP2 5-52.............................................................................5.2.32 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toMetro 1000 SS42SP2 5-54.............................................................................5.2.33 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4to Metro100 5-56.............................................................................................5.2.34 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toMetro100 5-57.................................................................................................5.2.35 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 toMetro100 5-59.................................................................................................

5.3 Overview of Subtending Cable 5-61...............................................................5.3.1 HW Cable 5-61.......................................................................................5.3.2 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame 5-62...................................................

5.4 Subscriber Cable 5-64....................................................................................5.4.1 Overview of Subscriber Cable 5-64.......................................................5.4.2 16-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable 5-65............................................5.4.3 32-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable 5-68............................................5.4.4 ATIA Subscriber Cable 5-71..................................................................5.4.5 EAUA Subscriber Cable 5-74.................................................................5.4.6 Overview of SDLT Subscriber Cable 5-76.............................................5.4.7 Four-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable 5-76...........................................5.4.8 Eight-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable 5-78..........................................

5.5 Maintenance Cable 5-80................................................................................5.6 Overview of Signal Cable 5-80.......................................................................

5.6.1 ESC Monitoring Cable 5-81...................................................................5.6.2 Test and Alarm Cable 5-82....................................................................5.6.3 Fan Monitoring Cable 5-82.....................................................................

Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations A-1....................................................

Index .................................................................................................................

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Hardware Description Manual

V100R009/V100R011


UA5000 Universal Access Unit

Hardware Description Manual

Manual Version T2-052585-20050820-C-1.B0

Product Version V100R009/V100R011

BOM 31250285

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]


Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, and TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.

Notice

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.


About This Manual

Release Notes

This manual applies to UA5000 Universal Access Unit V100R009/V100R011.

Related Manuals

The related manuals are listed in the following table.

Manual Content

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Technical Manual

It gives an overall description about the UA5000 system.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Hardware Description Manual

It describes the ONU components, and the cards and cables used in the ONUs.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Operation Manual

The operation manual consists of APM Volume, IPM Volume, PVM Volume and PVU Volume. They cover the service configurations and maintenance operations of the UA5000 when the main control card is APM, PVM, IPM or PVU respectively.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Command Help

The command help consists of APM Volume, IPM Volume, PVM Volume and PVU Volume. They provide all the commands of the UA5000 when the main control card is APM, PVM, IPM or PVU respectively. The command helps are contained in the documentation CD only.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Electronic Documentation CD

The CD contains all contents of the whole set of manuals.

Organization

The manual describes cabinets, service frames, cards and cables of the UA5000 series.

There are five chapters and one appendix in this manual.

Chapter 1 Overview describes the UA5000 cabinet series, and lists the service frames used in the UA5000.


Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames describes the service frames used in the UA5000.

Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards describes the cards used in the UA5000.

Chapter 4 Introduction to Front-Access Cables describes the front-access cables used in the UA5000.

Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear-Access Cables describes the rear-access cables used in the UA5000.

Appendix Acronyms and Abbreviations lists all the abbreviations and acronyms in this manual.

Intended Audience

The manual is intended for the following readers:

Telecom administrators Telecom technicians Installation and maintenance engineers of the UA5000

Conventions

The manual uses the following conventions:

I. General conventions

Convention Description

Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Boldface Headings are in Boldface.

II. Symbols

Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:

Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Note: Means a complementary description.


Environmental Protection

This product has been designed to comply with the requirements on environmental protection. For the proper storage, use and disposal of this product, national laws and regulations must be observed.

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit Table of Contents


i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 About the UA5000.............................................................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Configuration of the UA5000 ............................................................................................. 1-2

Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames.................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 HABA Frame...................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.2 Layout...................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.3 External Port............................................................................................................ 2-3

2.2 HABB Frame...................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-4 2.2.2 Layout...................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.2.3 External Port............................................................................................................ 2-6

2.3 HABD Frame...................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-7 2.3.2 Layout...................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.3.3 External Port............................................................................................................ 2-9

2.4 HABE Frame.................................................................................................................... 2-12 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-12 2.4.2 Layout.................................................................................................................... 2-12 2.4.3 External Port.......................................................................................................... 2-13

2.5 HABF Frame.................................................................................................................... 2-15 2.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-15 2.5.2 Layout.................................................................................................................... 2-15 2.5.3 External Port.......................................................................................................... 2-16

2.6 HABL Frame .................................................................................................................... 2-18 2.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-18 2.6.2 Layout.................................................................................................................... 2-19 2.6.3 External Port.......................................................................................................... 2-20

Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards .................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 About This Chapter ............................................................................................................ 3-1 3.2 ATM Service Processing Card–H601APMB...................................................................... 3-1

3.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.2.2 Front Panel.............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.2.3 Subcard ................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................... 3-10

3.3 Broadband Control Card of the Slave Frame–H601APSB.............................................. 3-11 3.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-11



ii

3.3.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-11 3.4 IP Service Processing Card–H601IPMB ......................................................................... 3-13

3.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-13 3.4.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-14 3.4.3 Subcard ................................................................................................................. 3-16 3.4.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................... 3-17

3.5 Packet Voice Processing Card–AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB....................... 3-18 3.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-18 3.5.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-19 3.5.3 Jumpers................................................................................................................. 3-21 3.5.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................... 3-22

3.6 Packet Voice Processing Card–H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG 3-23 3.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-23 3.6.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-24 3.6.3 Jumpers................................................................................................................. 3-27 3.6.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................... 3-28

3.7 V5 Interface Processing Unit–H601PVU8/H601PVU4.................................................... 3-29 3.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-29 3.7.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-30 3.7.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-33 3.7.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................... 3-34

3.8 Remote Subscriber Processing Card–H601RSU8/H601RSU4....................................... 3-35 3.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-35 3.8.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-36 3.8.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-38 3.8.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................... 3-40

3.9 Remote Subscriber Processing Card–H602RSUG (2G.SHDSL).................................... 3-41 3.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-41 3.9.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-41 3.9.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................... 3-43

3.10 ATM Port Card–H601AIUB............................................................................................ 3-45 3.10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-45 3.10.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-45 3.10.3 Subcard ............................................................................................................... 3-47 3.10.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-48

3.11 16-Port E1 Port Card–H601EDTB................................................................................. 3-50 3.11.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-50 3.11.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-50 3.11.3 Jumpers............................................................................................................... 3-51 3.11.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-54

3.12 16-Port ADSL Line Card–H601ADLB............................................................................ 3-56 3.12.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-56



iii

3.12.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-56 3.12.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-57 3.12.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-58

3.13 16-Port ADSL Line Card–H601ADLF ............................................................................ 3-59 3.13.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-59 3.13.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-59 3.13.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-60 3.13.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-61

3.14 16-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card–H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI ..................... 3-62 3.14.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-62 3.14.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-62 3.14.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-63

3.15 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card–H603ADRB............................................................. 3-64 3.15.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-64 3.15.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-64 3.15.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-65 3.15.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-66

3.16 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card–H605ADRB............................................................. 3-68 3.16.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-68 3.16.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-68 3.16.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-69 3.16.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-70

3.17 16-Port Analog Line Card–CB36ASL/CB37ASL ........................................................... 3-72 3.17.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-72 3.17.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-73 3.17.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-73

3.18 16-Port Analog Line Card–CB38ASL ............................................................................ 3-75 3.18.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-75 3.18.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-76 3.18.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-76

3.19 32-Port Analog Line Card–CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL ........................................ 3-78 3.19.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-78 3.19.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-79 3.19.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-79

3.20 16-Port Analog Line Card–CC0KASL/CC0MASL.......................................................... 3-81 3.20.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-81 3.20.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-82 3.20.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-82

3.21 6-Port 2/4-Wire E&M Port Card–H601ATIA .................................................................. 3-84 3.21.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-84 3.21.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-85 3.21.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-86



iv

3.21.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-87 3.22 16-Port Direct Dial-in Subscriber Port Card–H301CDI/CC01CDI ................................. 3-90

3.22.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-90 3.22.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-90 3.22.3 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane................................................... 3-91

3.23 16-port POTS and ADSL Combo Line Card–H601CSLB.............................................. 3-93 3.23.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-93 3.23.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-93 3.23.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-93 3.23.4 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane................................................... 3-94

3.24 16-Port POTS and ADSL Combo Line Card–H601CSLI............................................... 3-96 3.24.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-96 3.24.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-96 3.24.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-97 3.24.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane .................................................. 3-98

3.25 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card–H602CSMB.............................. 3-99 3.25.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-99 3.25.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-99 3.25.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-100 3.25.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-100

3.26 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card–H603CSMB/H603CSMC ....... 3-102 3.26.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-102 3.26.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-102 3.26.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-103 3.26.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-104

3.27 32-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card–H603CSRB ............................ 3-106 3.27.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-106 3.27.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-106 3.27.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-107 3.27.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-108

3.28 16-Port Circuit Emulation E1 Port Card–H601DEHA .................................................. 3-109 3.28.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-109 3.28.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-110 3.28.3 DIP Switches..................................................................................................... 3-110 3.28.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-112

3.29 8-Port Digital Line Card–CB02DSL/CB03DSL ............................................................ 3-114 3.29.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-114 3.29.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-114 3.29.3 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane................................................. 3-116

3.30 8-Port Digital Subscriber Line Card–CB05DSL........................................................... 3-117 3.30.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-117 3.30.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-117



v

3.30.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-119 3.31 8-Port Ethernet Access Unit Card–H601EAUA........................................................... 3-120

3.31.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-120 3.31.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-120 3.31.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-121

3.32 2-Port High Speed Line Card–H302HSL..................................................................... 3-123 3.32.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-123 3.32.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-124 3.32.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-125 3.32.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-126

3.33 2-Port High Speed Line Card–H303HSL..................................................................... 3-127 3.33.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-127 3.33.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-127 3.33.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-129 3.33.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-130

3.34 4-Port SHDSL and 4-Port E1 Card–H521SDL ............................................................ 3-132 3.34.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-132 3.34.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-133 3.34.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-134 3.34.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-136

3.35 16-Port SHDSL Line Card–H601SDLB ....................................................................... 3-138 3.35.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-138 3.35.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-138 3.35.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-139

3.36 8-Port SHDSL Line Card–H601SDLT.......................................................................... 3-140 3.36.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-140 3.36.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-141 3.36.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-142

3.37 16-Port VDSL Line Card–H601VDLA.......................................................................... 3-143 3.37.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-143 3.37.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-143 3.37.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-144

3.38 16-Port VDSL Line Card–H601VDLB.......................................................................... 3-145 3.38.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-145 3.38.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-145 3.38.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-146

3.39 16-Port Voice Frequency Port Card–CB02VFB .......................................................... 3-147 3.39.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-147 3.39.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-147 3.39.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-148 3.39.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-149

3.40 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Port Card–CB03VFB .......................................... 3-151



vi

3.40.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-151 3.40.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-151 3.40.3 DIP Switches..................................................................................................... 3-152 3.40.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-153

3.41 16-port Message LED Analog Line Card–CB01VMS.................................................. 3-155 3.41.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-155 3.41.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-156 3.41.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-156

3.42 Environment & Power Monitoring Card–H303ESC ..................................................... 3-158 3.42.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-158 3.42.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-159 3.42.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-159

3.43 Environment & Power Monitoring Card–H304ESC ..................................................... 3-161 3.43.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-161 3.43.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-162 3.43.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-162

3.44 Fan Control Card–H601FCB ....................................................................................... 3-164 3.44.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-164 3.44.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-164 3.44.3 DIP Switches..................................................................................................... 3-165

3.45 Remote Power Supply Monitoring Card–H611PWMA ................................................ 3-166 3.45.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-166 3.45.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-166

3.46 Secondary Power Supply Card–H602PWX0............................................................... 3-168 3.46.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-168 3.46.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-169 3.46.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-170

3.47 Secondary Power Supply Card–H602PWX2............................................................... 3-171 3.47.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-171 3.47.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-172 3.47.3 Jumpers............................................................................................................. 3-173

3.48 Subscriber Test Card–H601TSSB/H601TSSC ........................................................... 3-175 3.48.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-175 3.48.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-176 3.48.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-178

3.49 Rear Access E1 Conversion Card–H601E1TB ........................................................... 3-181 3.49.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-181 3.49.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-181 3.49.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-182

3.50 Front Access E1 Conversion Card–H601E1TF........................................................... 3-184 3.50.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-184 3.50.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-184



vii

3.51 Rear Access FE Conversion Card–H601EFTB........................................................... 3-185 3.51.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-185 3.51.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-186 3.51.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-187

3.52 Front Access E1/FE Conversion Card–H601EFTF..................................................... 3-188 3.52.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-188 3.52.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-188

3.53 High Speed Link Conversion Card from Front Access Master Frame to Extended Frame–H601HLAF............................................................................................................... 3-190

3.53.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-190 3.53.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-191

3.54 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access Extended Frame–H601HLEF .... 3-191 3.54.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-191 3.54.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-191

3.55 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access Slave Frame–H601HLSF........... 3-192 3.55.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-192 3.55.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-192

3.56 Rear Access HW Conversion Card of Master Frame–H601HWCB............................ 3-192 3.56.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-192 3.56.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-192

3.57 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Master Frame–H601HWCF............................ 3-194 3.57.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-194 3.57.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-194

3.58 HW Conversion Card of Rear Access Slave Frame–H601HWTB .............................. 3-195 3.58.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-195 3.58.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-195

3.59 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Extended Frame–H601HWTF........................ 3-196 3.59.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-196 3.59.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-196

3.60 32-Port Relay Rear Access Conversion Card–H601RATB......................................... 3-197 3.60.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-197 3.60.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-198 3.60.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-198

3.61 32-Port Front Access Relay Conversion Card–H601RATF ........................................ 3-200 3.61.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-200 3.61.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-201 3.61.3 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane ................................................ 3-202

3.62 Front Access Subscriber Cable Conversion Card–H601SLTF ................................... 3-203 3.62.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-203 3.62.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-204

Chapter 4 Introduction to Front-Access Cables ........................................................................ 4-1 4.1 About This Chapter ............................................................................................................ 4-1



viii

4.2 Digital Trunk Cable ............................................................................................................ 4-1 4.2.1 Overview of Digital Trunk Cable.............................................................................. 4-1 4.2.2 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ............................... 4-1 4.2.3 75-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ................................................. 4-1 4.2.4 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF .................................... 4-5 4.2.5 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF ................................................... 4-8 4.2.6 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF .......................................................... 4-8 4.2.7 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF...................................................... 4-11 4.2.8 E3/T3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF ................................................................ 4-14 4.2.9 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 ...................................... 4-16 4.2.10 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 .......................... 4-17 4.2.11 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 ........................ 4-21 4.2.12 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 .......................... 4-24 4.2.13 120-Ohm Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 ............................. 4-28 4.2.14 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF............................. 4-31 4.2.15 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF ................................... 4-31 4.2.16 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF ................................. 4-33 4.2.17 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF............................. 4-35 4.2.18 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF ................................... 4-35 4.2.19 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF ................................. 4-37 4.2.20 IPMB FE Upstream Cable................................................................................... 4-40 4.2.21 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB................... 4-40 4.2.22 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB .................... 4-40 4.2.23 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB .................. 4-43 4.2.24 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF...................... 4-46 4.2.25 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF.......................................... 4-46 4.2.26 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 ..... 4-46 4.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 ......................... 4-46

4.3 Subtending Cable ............................................................................................................ 4-47 4.3.1 HW Cable .............................................................................................................. 4-47 4.3.2 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame.......................................................................... 4-48 4.3.3 LVDS Cable for the Extended Frame.................................................................... 4-50

4.4 Subscriber Cable ............................................................................................................. 4-53 4.4.1 16-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable............................................................. 4-53 4.4.2 32-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable............................................................. 4-55 4.4.3 ATIA Subscriber Cable.......................................................................................... 4-59 4.4.4 EAUA Subscriber Cable........................................................................................ 4-61

4.5 Maintenance Cable.......................................................................................................... 4-63 4.5.1 Overview of Maintenance Cable ........................................................................... 4-63 4.5.2 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable.................................................................... 4-64 4.5.3 Overview of Network Cable................................................................................... 4-64 4.5.4 Straight Through Cable ......................................................................................... 4-65



ix

4.5.5 Cross Over Cable.................................................................................................. 4-66 4.6 Signal Cable..................................................................................................................... 4-66

4.6.1 Test and Alarm Cable ........................................................................................... 4-66 4.6.2 Test and Alarm Subtending Cable ........................................................................ 4-69

4.7 Optical Fiber..................................................................................................................... 4-70 4.7.1 Optical Fiber Type................................................................................................. 4-70 4.7.2 Fiber Selection Criteria.......................................................................................... 4-72 4.7.3 Optical Port Connector.......................................................................................... 4-73

Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear-Access Cables.......................................................................... 5-1 5.1 About This Chapter ............................................................................................................ 5-1 5.2 Trunk Cable ....................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.1 Overview of Trunk Cable......................................................................................... 5-1 5.2.2 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF ................................................... 5-1 5.2.3 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF .......................................................... 5-2 5.2.4 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF........................................................ 5-4 5.2.5 Overview of E3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF ................................................... 5-7 5.2.6 75-ohm E3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF .......................................................... 5-7 5.2.7 120-ohm E3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF........................................................ 5-9 5.2.8 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 ...................................... 5-10 5.2.9 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 ............................ 5-10 5.2.10 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 ........................ 5-14 5.2.11 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 .......................... 5-18 5.2.12 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 ........................ 5-21 5.2.13 E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ............................................... 5-25 5.2.14 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF .................................. 5-25 5.2.15 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ................................ 5-27 5.2.16 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF................................................. 5-29 5.2.17 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000............................... 5-29 5.2.18 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1..................... 5-30 5.2.19 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1................... 5-32 5.2.20 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP2..................... 5-34 5.2.21 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP2................... 5-36 5.2.22 IPMB Service Subtending Cable......................................................................... 5-38 5.2.23 IPMB Upstream Cable ........................................................................................ 5-41 5.2.24 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB ............. 5-41 5.2.25 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB .................... 5-41 5.2.26 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB .................. 5-44 5.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF .................................... 5-47 5.2.28 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 ......................... 5-47 5.2.29 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP15-47 5.2.30 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1........................................................................................................................................ 5-50



x

5.2.31 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP25-52 5.2.32 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2........................................................................................................................................ 5-54 5.2.33 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 ........ 5-56 5.2.34 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 ............... 5-57 5.2.35 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 ............. 5-59

5.3 Overview of Subtending Cable ........................................................................................ 5-61 5.3.1 HW Cable .............................................................................................................. 5-61 5.3.2 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame.......................................................................... 5-62

5.4 Subscriber Cable ............................................................................................................. 5-64 5.4.1 Overview of Subscriber Cable............................................................................... 5-64 5.4.2 16-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable................................................................... 5-65 5.4.3 32-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable................................................................... 5-68 5.4.4 ATIA Subscriber Cable.......................................................................................... 5-71 5.4.5 EAUA Subscriber Cable........................................................................................ 5-74 5.4.6 Overview of SDLT Subscriber Cable .................................................................... 5-76 5.4.7 Four-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable.................................................................. 5-76 5.4.8 Eight-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable................................................................. 5-78

5.5 Maintenance Cable.......................................................................................................... 5-80 5.6 Overview of Signal Cable ................................................................................................ 5-80

5.6.1 ESC Monitoring Cable........................................................................................... 5-81 5.6.2 Test and Alarm Cable ........................................................................................... 5-82 5.6.3 Fan Monitoring Cable............................................................................................ 5-82

Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations .................................................................................A-1

Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit List of Figures


xi

List of Figures

Figure 1–1 UA5000 in the overall solution............................................................................. 1-1

Figure 1–2 UA5000 series ..................................................................................................... 1-2

Figure 2–1 HABA frame layout .............................................................................................. 2-2

Figure 2–2 Ports on the HABA backplane ............................................................................. 2-3

Figure 2–3 HABB frame layout .............................................................................................. 2-5

Figure 2–4 Ports on the HABB backplane ............................................................................. 2-6

Figure 2–5 HABD frame layout .............................................................................................. 2-8

Figure 2–6 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABD frame....................................... 2-9

Figure 2–7 Power supply ports on the HABD frame............................................................ 2-11

Figure 2–8 HABE frame layout ............................................................................................ 2-13

Figure 2–9 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABE frame ..................................... 2-13

Figure 2–10 Power supply ports on the HABE frame .......................................................... 2-15

Figure 2–11 HABF frame layout........................................................................................... 2-16

Figure 2–12 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABF frame ................................... 2-17

Figure 2–13 Power supply ports on the HABF frame .......................................................... 2-18

Figure 2–14 HABL frame layout........................................................................................... 2-20

Figure 2–15 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABL frame.................................... 2-21

Figure 3–1 Front panel of the H601APMB card.....................................................................3-2

Figure 3–2 Subcards supported by the H601APMB board.................................................... 3-4

Figure 3–3 Pin assignment on the H601APMB card ........................................................... 3-10

Figure 3–4 Front panel of the H601APSB card ................................................................... 3-12

Figure 3–5 Buses and ports provided by the IPMB card ..................................................... 3-14

Figure 3–6 Front panel of the H601IPMB card ....................................................................3-15

Figure 3–7 Pin assignment on the H601IPMB card............................................................. 3-18

Figure 3–8 Front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card....................... 3-19

Figure 3–9 Layout of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card .............................. 3-21

Figure 3–10 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card ............................................................... 3-23

Figure 3–11 Front panel of the H601PVMB card................................................................. 3-24

Figure 3–12 Front panel of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card3-25

Figure 3–13 Layout of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card..... 3-27



xii

Figure 3–14 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card ........................................ 3-29

Figure 3–15 Front panels of the H601PVU8 and the H601PVU4 cards.............................. 3-30

Figure 3–16 Layout of the H601PVU8 card......................................................................... 3-33

Figure 3–17 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601PVU8 card............................ 3-35

Figure 3–18 Front panel of H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card .................................................... 3-36

Figure 3–1 ............................................................................................................................ 3-37

Figure 3–1 ............................................................................................................................ 3-37

Figure 3–1 ............................................................................................................................ 3-37

Figure 3–19 Layout of the H601RSU8 card......................................................................... 3-39

Figure 3–20 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601RSU8 card ........................... 3-40

Figure 3–21 Front panel of the H602RSUG card ................................................................ 3-42

Figure 3–22 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H602RSUG card........................... 3-44

Figure 3–23 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H602RSUG card ........................... 3-45

Figure 3–24 Front panel of the H601AIUB card .................................................................. 3-46

Figure 3–25 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601AIUB card............................. 3-49

Figure 3–26 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601AIUB card ............................. 3-50

Figure 3–27 Front panel of the H601EDTB card ................................................................. 3-51

Figure 3–28 Layout of the H601EDTB card......................................................................... 3-52

Figure 3–29 Pin assignment of the H601EDTB card (upper HEADER) .............................. 3-55

Figure 3–30 Pin assignment of the H601EDTB card (lower HEADER)............................... 3-56

Figure 3–31 Layout of the H601ADLB card......................................................................... 3-57

Figure 3–32 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ADLB card............................ 3-58

Figure 3–33 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ADLB card ............................ 3-59

Figure 3–34 Layout of the H601ADLF card ......................................................................... 3-60

Figure 3–35 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ADLF card............................ 3-61

Figure 3–36 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ADLF card ............................ 3-62

Figure 3–37 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card ............................................................................................................................... 3-63

Figure 3–38 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card ............................................................................................................................... 3-64

Figure 3–39 Front panel of the H603ADRB card................................................................. 3-65

Figure 3–40 Layout of the jumpers of the H603ADRB card ................................................ 3-66

Figure 3–41 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603ADRB card ........................... 3-67

Figure 3–42 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603ADRB card............................ 3-68



xiii

Figure 3–43 Front panel of the H605ADRB card................................................................. 3-69

Figure 3–44 Layout of the H605ADRB card ........................................................................ 3-70

Figure 3–45 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H605ADRB card ........................... 3-71

Figure 3–46 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H605ADRB card............................ 3-72

Figure 3–47 Pin assignment between the CC36ASL/CB37ASL card and the backplane (upper HEADER)........................................................................................................... 3-74

Figure 3–48 Pin assignment between the CC36ASL/CB37ASL card and the backplane (lower HEADER) ...................................................................................................................... 3-75

Figure 3–49 Pin assignment between the CB38ASL card and the backplane(upper HEADER)....................................................................................................................................... 3-77

Figure 3–50 Pin assignment between the CB38ASL card and the backplane (lower HEADER)....................................................................................................................................... 3-78

Figure 3–51 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card....................................................................................................................................... 3-80

Figure 3–52 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card3-81

Figure 3–53 Pin assignment between the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card and the backplane (upper HEADER)........................................................................................................... 3-83

Figure 3–54 Pin assignment between the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card and the backplane (lower HEADER) ........................................................................................................... 3-84

Figure 3–55 Front panel of the H601ATIA card ................................................................... 3-85

Figure 3–56 Layout of the H601ATIA card........................................................................... 3-86

Figure 3–57 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ATIA card ............................. 3-88

Figure 3–58 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ATIA card .............................. 3-89

Figure 3–59 Front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card .................................................... 3-90

Figure 3–60 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H301CDI/CC01CDI card .............. 3-92

Figure 3–61 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H301CDI/CC01CDI card............... 3-92

Figure 3–62 Pin assignment between the H601CSLB card and the backplane (upper HEADER) ...................................................................................................................... 3-95

Figure 3–63 Pin assignment between the H601CSLB card and the backplane (lower HEADER) ...................................................................................................................... 3-96

Figure 3–64 Pin assignment between the H601CSLI card and the backplane (upper HEADER)....................................................................................................................................... 3-98

Figure 3–65 Pin assignment between the H601CSLI card and the backplane (upper HEADER)....................................................................................................................................... 3-99

Figure 3–66 Pin assignment between the H602CSMB and the backplane (upper HEADER)3-101

Figure 3–67 Pin assignment between the H602CSMB and the backplane (lower HEADER)3-102



xiv

Figure 3–68 Jumpers of the H603CSMC card...................................................................3-103

Figure 3–69 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card ....3-105

Figure 3–70 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603CSMB/H603CMSC card.....3-106

Figure 3–71 Layout of the H603CSRB card ......................................................................3-107

Figure 3–72 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603CSRB card .........................3-108

Figure 3–73 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603CSRB card..........................3-109

Figure 3–74 Layout of the H601DEHA card ...................................................................... 3-110

Figure 3–75 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601DEHA card ......................... 3-113

Figure 3–76 Signal definition of lower HEADER on the H601DEHA card ......................... 3-113

Figure 3–77 Front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card ................................................ 3-115

Figure 3–78 Pin assignment of upper HEADER of the DSL card...................................... 3-116

Figure 3–79 Front panel of the CB05DSL card.................................................................. 3-118

Figure 3–80 Pin assignment between the CB05DSL card and the backplane (upper HEADER)..................................................................................................................................... 3-119

Figure 3–81 Front panel of the H601EAUA card ...............................................................3-120

Figure 3–82 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601EAUA card .........................3-122

Figure 3–83 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601EAUA card ..........................3-123

Figure 3–84 Front panel of the H302HSL card ..................................................................3-124

Figure 3–85 Layout of the H302HSL card .........................................................................3-125

Figure 3–86 Front panel of the H303HSL card ..................................................................3-128

Figure 3–87 Layout of the H303HSL card .........................................................................3-129

Figure 3–88 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H303HSL card ............................3-131

Figure 3–89 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H303HSL card.............................3-132

Figure 3–90 Front panel of the H521SDL card ..................................................................3-133

Figure 3–91 Layout of the H521SDL card .........................................................................3-135

Figure 3–92 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H521SDL card ............................3-137

Figure 3–93 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H521SDL card.............................3-138

Figure 3–94 Pin assignment between the H601SDLB card and the backplane (upper HEADER) ....................................................................................................................3-139

Figure 3–95 Pin assignment between the H601SDLB card and the backplane (lower HEADER) ....................................................................................................................3-140

Figure 3–96 Front panel of the H601SDLT card ................................................................3-141

Figure 3–97 Pin assignment of the H601SDLT card on the lower HEADER.....................3-143

Figure 3–98 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601VDLA card..........................3-144

Figure 3–99 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601VDLA card ..........................3-145



xv

Figure 3–100 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601VDLB card........................3-146

Figure 3–101 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601VDLB card ........................3-147

Figure 3–102 Layout of the CB02VFB card.......................................................................3-148

Figure 3–103 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the CB02VFB..................................3-150

Figure 3–104 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the CB02VFB ..................................3-151

Figure 3–105 Layout of the CB03VFB card.......................................................................3-152

Figure 3–106 Pin assignment between the CB03VFB card and the backplane (upper HEADER) ....................................................................................................................3-154

Figure 3–107 Pin assignment between the CB03VFB card and the backplane (lower HEADER) ....................................................................................................................3-155

Figure 3–108 Pin assignment between the CB01VMS card and the backplane (upper HEADER) ....................................................................................................................3-157

Figure 3–109 Pin assignment between the CB01VMS card and the backplane (lower HEADER) ....................................................................................................................3-158

Figure 3–110 Front panel of the H303ESC card................................................................3-159

Figure 3–111 Layout of the H303ESC ...............................................................................3-160

Figure 3–112 Front panel of the H304ESC card................................................................3-162

Figure 3–113 Layout of the H304ESC card .......................................................................3-163

Figure 3–114 Front panel of the H601FCB card................................................................3-165

Figure 3–115 Layout of the H601FCB card .......................................................................3-165

Figure 3–116 Front panel of the H611PWMA card ............................................................3-167

Figure 3–117 Front panel of the H602PWX0 card.............................................................3-169

Figure 3–118 Layout of the H602PWX0 card ....................................................................3-171

Figure 3–119 Front panel of the H602PWX2 card.............................................................3-172

Figure 3–120 Layout of the H602PWX2 card ....................................................................3-174

Figure 3–121 Front panel of the H601TSSB card (left) and the H601TSSC card (right) ..3-176

Figure 3–122 Pin assignment of three ports on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card .............................................................................................................................3-177

Figure 3–123 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card ....3-179

Figure 3–124 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card.....3-180

Figure 3–125 Definition of J3 and J4 on the front panel of the card..................................3-182

Figure 3–126 Pin assignment between the H601E1TB card and the backplane (J1).......3-183

Figure 3–127 Pin assignment between the H601E1TB card and the backplane (J2).......3-183

Figure 3–128 Front panel of the H601E1TF card ..............................................................3-184

Figure 3–129 Definition of the pins on the front panel of the H601EFTB card ..................3-186



xvi

Figure 3–130 Pin assignment between the H601EFTB card and the backplane (J1).......3-187

Figure 3–131 Pin assignment between the H601EFTB card and the backplane (J2).......3-188

Figure 3–132 Front panel of the H601EFTF card..............................................................3-189

Figure 3–133 Front panel of the H601HLAF card..............................................................3-191

Figure 3–134 Front panel of the H601HLEF card..............................................................3-191

Figure 3–135 Front panel of the H601HLSF card..............................................................3-192

Figure 3–136 Front panel of the H601HWCB card............................................................3-193

Figure 3–137 Front panel of the H601HWCF card ............................................................3-194

Figure 3–138 Front panel of the H601HWTF card ............................................................3-196

Figure 3–139 Pin assignment on the front panel of the H601RATB card..........................3-198

Figure 3–140 Pin assignment of connector J1 ..................................................................3-199

Figure 3–141 Pin assignment of connector J2 ..................................................................3-200

Figure 3–142 Ports on the front panel of the H601RATF card ..........................................3-202

Figure 3–143 Pin assignment on the front panel of the H601RATF card ..........................3-203

Figure 3–144 Front panel of the H601SLTF card ..............................................................3-204

Figure 4–1 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF .............. 4-2

Figure 4–2 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ..................... 4-5

Figure 4–3 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF .................................. 4-8

Figure 4–4 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF .............................. 4-11

Figure 4–5 Outline of the 75-ohm E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF........................... 4-15

Figure 4–6 Outline of the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable......................................... 4-15

Figure 4–7 Outline of the cable to the DDF ......................................................................... 4-16

Figure 4–8 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1..... 4-17

Figure 4–9 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1...4-21

Figure 4–10 Outline of the 75-ohm trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 ........ 4-25

Figure 4–11 Outline of the 120-ohm trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 ...... 4-28

Figure 4–12 Outline of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF............ 4-31

Figure 4–13 Outline of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF.......... 4-33

Figure 4–14 Outline of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF............ 4-35

Figure 4–15 Outline of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF.......... 4-38

Figure 4–16 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB4-40


Figure 4–18 Outline of the HW cable................................................................................... 4-47

Figure 4–19 Outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame................................................. 4-48



xvii

Figure 4–20 Outline of the LVDS cable for the extended frame. ......................................... 4-50

Figure 4–21 Outline of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable................................... 4-54

Figure 4–22 Outline of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable................................... 4-56

Figure 4–23 Outline of the ATIA subscriber cable................................................................ 4-59

Figure 4–24 Outline of the EAUA subscriber cable ............................................................. 4-61

Figure 4–25 Outline of the local maintenance cable............................................................ 4-64

Figure 4–26 Outline of the straight through cable................................................................ 4-65

Figure 4–27 Outline of the cross over cable ........................................................................ 4-66

Figure 4–28 Outline of the test and alarm cable.................................................................. 4-67

Figure 4–29 Outline of the test and alarm subtending cable ............................................... 4-69


Figure 5–2 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF ................................ 5-5


Figure 5–4 Outline of the 120-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF ................................ 5-9


Figure 5–6 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42 SP1..5-15


Figure 5–8 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2...5-22

Figure 5–9 Outline of the 75-ohm trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.................. 5-25

Figure 5–10 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ........ 5-27

Figure 5–11 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP15-30




Figure 5–15 Outline of the IPMB service subtending cable................................................. 5-38



Figure 5–18 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.............................................................................................................. 5-48



Figure 5–21 Outline of the120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2.............................................................................................................. 5-55



xviii

Figure 5–22 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 .......................................................................................................................5-57

Figure 5–23 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 .......................................................................................................................5-59

Figure 5–24 Outline of the HW cable................................................................................... 5-61

Figure 5–25 Outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame................................................. 5-63

Figure 5–26 Outline of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable. ........................................ 5-65

Figure 5–27 Outline of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable. ........................................ 5-68

Figure 5–28 Outline of the ATIA subscriber cable................................................................ 5-71

Figure 5–29 Outline of the EAUA subscriber cable ............................................................. 5-74

Figure 5–30 Outline of the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable......................................... 5-77

Figure 5–31 Outline of the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable ....................................... 5-78

Figure 5–32 Outline of the ESC monitoring cable ............................................................... 5-81

Figure 5–33 Outline of the fan monitoring cable.................................................................. 5-82

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit List of Tables


xix

List of Tables

Table 1–1 Service frames used in the UA5000 series ........................................................... 1-2

Table 2–1 Types of cards in the HABA frame......................................................................... 2-1

Table 2–2 Description of the ports on the HABA backplane .................................................. 2-4

Table 2–3 Types of cards in the HABB frame ........................................................................ 2-5

Table 2–4 Description of the ports on the HABB backplane. ................................................. 2-7

Table 2–5 Types of cards in the HABD frame ........................................................................ 2-8

Table 2–6 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABD frame................................. 2-9

Table 2–7 Description of power supply ports on the HABD frame....................................... 2-11

Table 2–8 Types of cards in the HABE frame ...................................................................... 2-12

Table 2–9 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABE frame ............................... 2-14

Table 2–10 Description of power supply ports on the HABE frame ..................................... 2-15

Table 2–11 Types of cards in the HABF frame..................................................................... 2-15

Table 2–12 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABF frame ............................. 2-17

Table 2–13 Description of the power supply ports on the HABF frame ............................... 2-18

Table 2–14 Types of cards in the HABL frame..................................................................... 2-19

Table 2–15 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABL frame.............................. 2-21

Table 3–1 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APMB card ..................... 3-2

Table 3–2 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601APMB card3-3

Table 3–3 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB card (I) ............................ 3-5

Table 3–4 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (II) ......................... 3-5

Table 3–5 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (III) ........................ 3-6

Table 3–6 lists the subcards near the front panel. .................................................................. 3-8

Table 3–6 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (IV)........................ 3-8

Table 3–7 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (V)......................... 3-8

Table 3–8 DIP switches S1 and S4 of the H601CESA card .................................................. 3-9

Table 3–9 DIP switches S2 and S3 of the H601CESA card .................................................. 3-9

Table 3–10 DIP switches S1, S2 and S4 of the H601E8IA card............................................ 3-9

Table 3–11 DIP switches S3 and S5 of the H601E8IA card ................................................ 3-10

Table 3–12 Pin assignment on the H601APMB backplane ................................................. 3-11

Table 3–13 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APSB card.................. 3-12



xx

Table 3–14 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601IPMB card................... 3-15

Table 3–15 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601IPMB card3-16

Table 3–16 Subcards supported by the H601IPMB card..................................................... 3-16

Table 3–17 Pin assignment on J3 of the H601IPMB backplane.......................................... 3-18

Table 3–18 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card ............................................................... 3-20

Table 3–19 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card ............................................................... 3-20

Table 3–20 Settings and meanings of jumpers J6 and J13 ................................................. 3-21

Table 3–21 Description of the LEDS on the front panel of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card ........................................ 3-25

Table 3–22 Description of the ports and the button on the front panel of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card ........................................ 3-26

Table 3–23 Settings and meanings of jumpers J6 and J7 on the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card ........................................ 3-27

Table 3–24 Descriptions of the LEDs on the front panels of the H601PVU8 and the H601PVU4 cards........................................................................................................... 3-31

Table 3–25 Description of the button, the switch, and the ports on the front panel of the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card ......................................................................................... 3-32

Table 3–26 Setting of the DIP switch of the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card........................... 3-33

Table 3–27 Settings and meanings of jumpers J14 and J16 ............................................... 3-34


Table 3–29 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card3-37

Table 3–30 Description of the button, the switch, and the ports on the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card......................................................................................... 3-38

Table 3–31 Setting of the DIP switch of the H601RSU8 card.............................................. 3-38



Table 3–34 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602RSUG card ................. 3-42

Table 3–35 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H602RSUG card3-43

Table 3–36 Description of characters in the following figures.............................................. 3-43

Table 3–37 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601AIUB card ................... 3-46

Table 3–38 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H601AIUB card3-47

Table 3–39 Subcards on the H601AIUB card ...................................................................... 3-47

Table 3–40 Description of DIP switches of the H601E8IA subcard ..................................... 3-48

Table 3–41 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EDTB card.................. 3-51



xxi

Table 3–42 Settings of the jumpers on the H601EDTB card ............................................... 3-52

Table 3–43 Relationship between pins of J600/J700/J800/J900 and E1 signals ................ 3-53

Table 3–44 Relationship between pins of J501/J502 and E1 signals.................................. 3-53

Table 3–45 Definition of pins of J203................................................................................... 3-54

Table 3–46 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601ADLB card.................... 3-57

Table 3–47 Settings of DIP switch of the H601ADLB card .................................................. 3-57

Table 3–48 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601ADLF card .................... 3-60

Table 3–49 Settings of jumper of the H601ADLF card ........................................................ 3-60

Table 3–50 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card .................................................................... 3-63

Table 3–51 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603ADRB card ................... 3-65

Table 3–52 Settings of jumper S1 of the H603ADRB card .................................................. 3-66

Table 3–53 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H605ADRB card ................... 3-69

Table 3–54 Settings of jumper of the H605ADRB card........................................................ 3-70

Table 3–55 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB36ASL/CB37ASL card ..... 3-73

Table 3–56 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB38ASL card ...................... 3-76

Table 3–57 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card ............................................................................................................................... 3-79

Table 3–58 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card.... 3-82

Table 3–59 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601ATIA card .................... 3-85

Table 3–60 Settings of DIP switch SW1............................................................................... 3-87

Table 3–61 Settings of DIP switch SW2............................................................................... 3-87

Table 3–62 Settings of DIP switches SW3–SW14............................................................... 3-87

Table 3–63 Meanings of signal cables of the H60ATIA card................................................ 3-89

Table 3–64 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card..... 3-91

Table 3–65 Description of front panel of the H601CSLB card ............................................. 3-93

Table 3–66 Jumper settings of the H601CSLB card............................................................ 3-94

Table 3–67 Description of the front panel of the H601CSLI card ....................................... 3-96

Table 3–68 Jumper settings of the H601CSLI card ............................................................. 3-97

Table 3–69 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H602CSMB card.................3-100

Table 3–70 Jumper settings of the H602CSMB/H602CSMC card ....................................3-100

Table 3–71 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card3-103

Table 3–72 Settings of jumpers of the H603CSMC card ...................................................3-104

Table 3–73 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603CSRB card .................3-107



xxii

Table 3–74 Settings of jumpers S1 and S2 of the H603CSRB card..................................3-107

Table 3–75 Description of the LED ON the front panel of the H601DEHA card ................ 3-110

Table 3–76 Settings and meanings of DIP switches S1, S2, S5, and S6 ...........................3-111

Table 3–77 Settings of DIP switches S3 and S4.................................................................3-111

Table 3–78 Settings of DIP switch S8 ................................................................................ 3-112

Table 3–79 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card . 3-115

Table 3–80 describes the details on the front panel of the CB05DSL card. ....................... 3-118

Table 3–80 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CB05DSL card .................. 3-118

Table 3–81 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EAUA card................3-121

Table 3–82 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H302HSL card...................3-125

Table 3–83 Settings of DIP switches and jumpers on the H302HSL card .........................3-126

Table 3–84 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H303HSL card...................3-128

Table 3–85 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H303HSL card3-129

Table 3–86 Settings of DIP switches on the H303HSL card..............................................3-130

Table 3–87 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H521SDL card...................3-133

Table 3–88 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H521SDL card3-134

Table 3–89 Settings of DIP switches of the H521SDL card...............................................3-135

Table 3–90 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601SDLB card ..................3-139

Table 3–91 Description of the front panel of the H601SDLT card......................................3-142

Table 3–92 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H601SDLT card3-142

Table 3–93 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601VDLA card ..................3-143

Table 3–94 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601VDLB card ..................3-146

Table 3–95 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB02VFB card ....................3-148

Table 3–96 Settings of DIP switches of the CB02VFB card ..............................................3-148

Table 3–97 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB03VFB card ....................3-151

Table 3–98 Settings of DIP switches of the CB03VFB card ..............................................3-152

Table 3–99 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB01VMS card ...................3-156

Table 3–100 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H303ESC card..................3-159

Table 3–101 Description of the switch on the front panel of the H303ESC card...............3-159

Table 3–102 Settings of jumpers of the H303ESC card ....................................................3-160

Table 3–103 Settings of DIP switch S6 on the H303ESC card..........................................3-161

Table 3–104 Settings of DIP switch S7 on the H303ESC card..........................................3-161

Table 3–105 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H304ESC card..................3-162



xxiii

Table 3–106 Description of the switch and the button on the front panel of the H304ESC card.....................................................................................................................................3-162

Table 3–107 Settings of DIP switches of the H304ESC card ............................................3-163

Table 3–108 Settings of jumpers on the H304ESC card ...................................................3-164

Table 3–109 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601FCB card ..................3-165

Table 3–110 Settings of DIP switches SW101-5 and SW101-6 ........................................3-165

Table 3–111 Settings of DIP switchesSW101-7 and SW101-8 .........................................3-166

Table 3–112 Factory settings of DIP switches SW101-5 to SW101-8...............................3-166

Table 3–113 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H611PWMA card.............3-167

Table 3–114 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H611PWMA card.....................................................................................................................................3-168

Table 3–115 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card .............3-170

Table 3–116 Description of the switches on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card ........3-170

Table 3–117 Settings of jumpers on the H602PWX0 card.................................................3-171

Table 3–118 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602PWX2 card .............3-173

Table 3–119 Settings of jumpers on the H602PWX2 card.................................................3-175

Table 3–120 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card3-176

Table 3–121 Description of the ports on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card3-177

Table 3–122 Description of pins of three ports on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card.........3-177

Table 3–123 Description of pin assignment of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card ..............3-180

Table 3–124 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601E1TF card ..........................3-184

Table 3–125 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601EFTF card..........................3-189

Table 3–126 Description of the front panel of the H601HWCB card .................................3-193

Table 3–127 Connectors on the front panel of the H601HWCF card ................................3-194

Table 3–128 Description of the port on the front panel of the H601HWTB card................3-196

Table 3–129 Connectors on the front panel of the H601HWTF card.................................3-197

Table 3–130 Pins on the H601RATB card .........................................................................3-200

Table 3–131 Pins on the H601RATF card..........................................................................3-203

Table 3–132 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601SLTF card ..........................3-204

Table 4–1 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF................ 4-2

Table 4–2 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF...4-2

Table 4–3 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF....................... 4-5

Table 4–4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.......... 4-6

Table 4–5 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.................................... 4-8



xxiv

Table 4–6 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF....................... 4-9

Table 4–7 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF................................ 4-12

Table 4–8 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF................... 4-12

Table 4–9 Labels on the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable .......................................... 4-15

Table 4–10 Labels on the cable to the DDF......................................................................... 4-16

Table 4–11 Pin assignment of the E3/T3 cable to the DDF ................................................. 4-16

Table 4–12 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 .... 4-17

Table 4–13 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1....................................................................................................................................... 4-18

Table 4–14 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 ..4-21

Table 4–15 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1....................................................................................................................... 4-22





Table 4–20 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I) ......... 4-32

Table 4–21 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II) ........ 4-32

Table 4–22 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I)4-32

Table 4–23 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II)4-33

Table 4–24 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I) ....... 4-34

Table 4–25 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II) ...... 4-34

Table 4–26 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I)....................................................................................................................................... 4-34

Table 4–27 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II)....................................................................................................................................... 4-35

Table 4–28 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I) ......... 4-36

Table 4–29 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II) ........ 4-36

Table 4–30 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I)4-36

Table 4–31 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II)4-37

Table 4–32 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I) ....... 4-38

Table 4–33 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II) ...... 4-38



xxv

Table 4–34 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I)....................................................................................................................................... 4-39

Table 4–35 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II)....................................................................................................................................... 4-39

Table 4–36 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB ............................................................................................................................ 4-41


Table 4–38 Pin assignment of the HW cable ....................................................................... 4-47

Table 4–39 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for slave frame ........................................... 4-48

Table 4–40 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for extended frame..................................... 4-50

Table 4–41 Pin assignment of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable ....................... 4-54

Table 4–42 Pin assignment of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable ....................... 4-56

Table 4–43 Pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable .................................................... 4-59

Table 4–44 Labels on the EAUA subscriber cable ............................................................... 4-61

Table 4–45 Pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable .................................................. 4-62

Table 4–46 Pin assignment of the maintenance cable......................................................... 4-64

Table 4–47 Pin assignment of the straight through cable .................................................... 4-65

Table 4–48 Pin assignment of the cross over cable............................................................. 4-66

Table 4–49 Label prints on the test and alarm cable ........................................................... 4-67

Table 4–50 Pin assignment of the test and alarm cable ...................................................... 4-67

Table 4–51 Label prints on the test and alarm subtending cable......................................... 4-69

Table 4–52 Pin assignment of the test and alarm subtending cable.................................... 4-70

Table 4–53 Optical fibers used by the cards of the UA5000................................................ 4-70

Table 4–54 Common optical connectors .............................................................................. 4-73


Table 5–2 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF..................... 5-5

Table 5–3 Labels on the 75-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.................................... 5-8


Table 5–5 Labels on the 120-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.................................. 5-9

Table 5–6 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF................... 5-10

Table 5–7 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1....................................................................................................................... 5-11




xxvi





Table 5–13 Description of the labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2.............................................................................................................. 5-22


Table 5–15 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ............................................................................................................................... 5-25

Table 5–16 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF5-26

Table 5–17 Description of the labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF ........................................................................................................................... 5-27

Table 5–18 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF5-28

Table 5–19 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP15-30

Table 5–20 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1....................................................................................................................... 5-31







Table 5–27 Description of the labels on the IPMB service subtending cable ...................... 5-38

Table 5–28 Pin assignment of the IPMB service subtending cable ..................................... 5-39

Table 5–29 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB .............................................................................. 5-41




xxvii

Table 5–31 Description of the labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB .............................................................................. 5-44


Table 5–33 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.............................................................................................................. 5-48

Table 5–34 Pin assignment of the75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.................................................................................................... 5-49

Table 5–35 Labels on the120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.............................................................................................................. 5-50

Table 5–36 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.................................................................................................... 5-51

Table 5–37 Labels on the75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2.............................................................................................................. 5-53


Table 5–39 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2.............................................................................................................. 5-55


Table 5–41 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 100........................................................................ 5-57

Table 5–42 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 100 ......................................................................................................................5-57

Table 5–43 Description of labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100......................................................................... 5-59

Table 5–44 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 .......................................................................................................................5-59

Table 5–45 Pin assignment of the HW cable ....................................................................... 5-61

Table 5–46 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for the slave frame..................................... 5-63

Table 5–47 Pin assignment of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable ............................. 5-65

Table 5–48 Description of the labels on the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable .............. 5-68

Table 5–49 Pin assignment of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable ............................. 5-69

Table 5–50 Description of labels on the ATIA subscriber cable ........................................... 5-71

Table 5–51 Pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable .................................................... 5-72

Table 5–52 Description of the labels on the EAUA subscriber cable................................... 5-74

Table 5–53 Pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable.................................................. 5-75



xxviii

Table 5–54 Description of labels on the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable .................... 5-77

Table 5–55 Pin assignment of the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable ............................. 5-77

Table 5–56 Description of labels on the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable................... 5-79

Table 5–57 Pin assignment of the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable ........................... 5-79

Table 5–58 Description of the labels on the ESC monitoring cable..................................... 5-81

Table 5–59 Pin assignment of the ESC monitoring cable.................................................... 5-81

Table 5–60 Description of the labels on the fan monitoring cable ....................................... 5-82

Table 5–61 Pin assignment of the fan monitoring cable ...................................................... 5-82

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 1 Overview


1-1

Chapter 1 Overview

The UA5000 series is the integrated universal access unit for integrated broadband and narrowband services. Figure 1–1 shows the UA5000 series in the overall solution.

E1(V5) FE/GESTM-1

DDN ATM IP

SDH/MSTP/VP Ring

(H.248/MGCP)

ADSLADSL2+VDSL

SHDSL

E1

PSTN

STM-1

Convergencelayer

Access layer

Terminalequipment

POTSISDNVoIP

V.24V.35E1

LAN

(H.248/MGCP)

: UA5000 : SoftSwitch

Figure 1–1 UA5000 in the overall solution

1.1 About the UA5000 The UA5000 series is the most important Optical Network Unit (ONU). Figure 1–2 shows the UA5000 series. They provide different capacities and maintenance modes and can be applied in different scenarios.

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 1 Overview


1-2

512A

1000A

F01A

F02A

F01AF

F02AF

60A

F01D100

F01D500

F01D600F01D20

0

室内型室外型

F01D1000

512A

1000A

F01A

F02A

F01AF

F02AF

60A

F01D100

F01D500

F01D600

Front access

Indoor series Outdoor series

Rear access

F01D1000

512

1000A

F01

F02A

F01AF

60A

F01D500

F01D600

室内型室外型

F01D1000

F01A

F01AF

F01D100

F01D500

Indoor series Outdoor series

F01D1000

F01D200

F02AF

F02A

Figure 1–2 UA5000 series

The following describes the front access and rear access.

Front access: The cabinet can be placed against the wall. Card insertion/removing, cabling, maintenance and operation can be done at the front.

Rear access: The cabinet cannot be placed against the wall. Cables are routed at the rear, while card insertion or removing is conducted at the front.

1.2 Configuration of the UA5000 Table 1–1 lists the service frames used in the UA5000 series.

Table 1–1 Service frames used in the UA5000 series

Cabinet type Service frame

F01A HABA (master frame)

F02A HABA (master frame), HABB (extended frame)

F01AF HABD (master frame), HABE (slave frame), HABF (extended frame)

F02AF HABD (master frame), HABE (slave frame), HABF (extended frame)

F01D100 HABL (master frame)

F01D200 HABD (master frame)

F01D500 HABD (master frame), HABF (extended frame)

F01D1000 HABD (master frame), HABE (slave frame), HABF (extended frame)

For description of the service frames, see "Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames"; for description of the cards, see "Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards".

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames


2-1

Chapter 2 Introduction to Service Frames

This chapter introduces service frames of the UA5000.

2.1 HABA Frame

2.1.1 Overview

The HABA frame is the master frame of the rear-access UA5000.

The HABA frame has 36 slots, and its configuration is as follows:

Two secondary power supply cards (PWX) work in the load sharing mode. Two broadband control cards reside in slots 2 and 3, supporting dual-system hot

backup. Two narrowband control cards reside in slots 4 and 5, supporting dual-system hot

backup. The AIUB card can reside in slots 6 and 7 only, and the TSSB or TSSC card can

reside in slot 17 only. There are 30 slots for line cards. Narrowband and broadband line cards can be

intermixed.

2.1.2 Layout

The HABA frame is 16 U (1 U = 44.45 mm) high. It can hold the following types of cards, as listed in Table 2–1.

Table 2–1 Types of cards in the HABA frame

Type Card

ATM Broadband control card APMB

IP Broadband control card IPMB

Narrowband control card PVU8, PVU4, and PVM

Remote subscriber unit RSU8 and RSU4

ATM interface card AIUB

Broadband line card ADLB, ADRB, SDLB, ADLF, ADMB, ADMC, ADMI, VDLA/VDLB, and EAUA

Narrowband line card ASL/A32, DSL, VFB, CDI, SDL, SDLT, and EDTB

Broadband and narrowband combo line card

CSMB, CSMC, CSLB, CSRB, and CSLI



2-2

Type Card

Secondary power supply card PWX

Test card TSSB and TSSC

Figure 2–1 shows the HABA frame layout.

01 0200

Fan

PWX

xSL

xPMB

PVx/RSUx

PWX

AIUB/xSL

Cable routing area

xPMB

AIUB/xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

TSSx/xSL

PVx/RSUx

03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Fan

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 3318 34 35

Cable routing area

Figure 2–1 HABA frame layout

In Figure 2–1,

PWX stands for the secondary power supply card. xPMB can be either the ATM or IP broadband control card. AIUB stands for the ATM interface card. PVx stands for the narrowband control card. TSSx stands for the test card. RSUx stands for the remote subscriber unit. xSL stands for the line card.

The HABA frame uses the H601HABA backplane.



2-3

Note:

The PVx card can start up normally only after the PWX card works normally.

2.1.3 External Port

I. Ports in the cable connecting area

Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABA frame through the ports on the backplane or through relevant conversion cards. Figure 2–2 shows the external ports on the HABA backplane.

-48 VDC port of theupper half frame

-48 VDC port of thelower half frame

E1/FE port of thebroadband control card

Monitor and alarm ports

Cable connecting area ofthe backplane for line cards

LVDS subtending port

Cable connecting area of the backplane for line cards

Cable connecting area ofthe backplane fornarrowband control cards

Figure 2–2 Ports on the HABA backplane

Table 2–2 describes the ports on the HABA backplane.



2-4

Table 2–2 Description of the ports on the HABA backplane

Marks in Figure 2–2 Conversion card Line card

Cable connecting area of the corresponding backplane of the narrowband control card

HWCB PVU8/PVU4/PVM/RSU8/RSU4

Cable connecting area of the corresponding backplane of the line card

EFTB E1TB RATB

EAUA DEHA/EDTB/AIUB 16-port and 32-port line cards

E1/FE port of the broadband control card Not applicable (NA) NA

LVDS subtending port NA NA

–48 VDC port of the upper half frame NA NA

–48 VDC port of the lower half frame NA NA

Monitor and alarm ports NA NA

II. Power supply ports

The HABA frame provides two –48 VDC ports, residing at the back of the backplane, as shown in Figure 2–2.

2.2 HABB Frame

2.2.1 Overview

The HABB frame is the slave frame of the rear-access UA5000, working under the control of the HABA frame.

The HABB frame has 36 slots, and its configuration is as follows:

Two PWX cards work in the load sharing mode. Two broadband control cards reside in slots 2 and 3, supporting dual-system hot

backup. There is no narrowband control card, and narrowband services are controlled by

the narrowband control card in the HABA frame. There are 32 slots for line cards. Narrowband and broadband line cards can be

intermixed.



2-5

2.2.2 Layout

The HABA frame is 16 U high. It can hold the following types of cards, as listed in Table 2–3.

Table 2–3 Types of cards in the HABB frame

Type Card

ATM broadband control card APSB



Broadband and narrowband combo line card CSMB, CSMC, CSLB, CSRB, and CSLI



Figure 2–3 shows the HABB frame layout.

01 0200

Fan

PWX

xSL

APSB

PWX

xSL

Cable routing area

APSB

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Fan

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 3318 34 35

xSL

xSL

Cable routing area

Figure 2–3 HABB frame layout

In Figure 2–3,



2-6

PWX stands for secondary power supply card. TSSx stands for test card. APSB stands for broadband control card of the HABB frame xSL stands for the line card.

The HABB frame uses the H601HABB backplane.

2.2.3 External Port


Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABB frame through the ports on the backplane or through relevant conversion cards. Figure 2–4 shows the external ports on the HABB backplane.

-48 VDC port of theupper half frame

-48 VDC port of thelower half frame

E1/FE port of thebroadband control card

Monitor and alarm ports

Cable connecting area ofthe backplane for line cards

LVDS subtending port

Cable connecting area of the backplane for line cards

Figure 2–4 Ports on the HABB backplane

Table 2–4 describes the ports on the HABB backplane.



2-7

Table 2–4 Description of the ports on the HABB backplane.

Marks in Figure 2–4 Conversion card Line card

Cable connecting area of the corresponding backplane of the narrowband control card

HWCB PVU8/PVU4/PVM/RSU8/RSU4

Cable connecting area of the corresponding backplane of the line card

EFTB E1TB RATB

EAUA DEHA/EDTB/AIUB 16-port and 32-port line cards

E1/FE port of the broadband control card NA NA

LVDS subtending port NA NA

–48 VDC port of the upper frame NA NA

–48 VDC port of the lower frame NA NA

Monitor and alarm ports NA NA


The HABB frame provides two –48 VDC ports, residing at the back of the backplane, as shown in Figure 2–4.

2.3 HABD Frame

2.3.1 Overview

The HABD frame is the master frame of the front-access UA5000.

The HABD frame provides 18 slots, and its configuration is as follows:


backup. Two narrowband control cards reside in slots 4 and 5, supporting dual-system hot

backup. The AIUB card can reside in slots 6 and 7 only, and the TSSB or TSSC card can

reside in slot 17 only. There are 12 slots for line cards. Narrowband and broadband line cards can be

intermixed.



2-8

2.3.2 Layout

The HABD frame is 10 U high. It can hold the following types of cards.

Table 2–5 Types of cards in the HABD frame

Type Card



Narrowband control card PVU8, PVU4, PVM








Figure 2–5 shows the HABD frame layout.

Control and interconnectcable connecting area

PW

RIO PW

RIO PW

RIO

xPMB

xPMB

PWx

PWx

PVx

PVx

AIUB/xSL

AIUB/xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

TSSB/xSL

Fan00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Cable routing area

Subscriber cableconnecting area

Figure 2–5 HABD frame layout

In Figure 2–5,

PWX stands for the secondary power supply card. xPMB can be either the ATM or IP broadband control card.



2-9

APSB stands for the broadband control card of the HABE frame. PVx stands for the narrowband control card. AIUB stands for the ATM interface card. xSL stands for the line card. TSSx stands for the test card.

The HABD frame uses the H601HABD backplane.

Note:


2.3.3 External Port


Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABD frame through relevant conversion cards. Figure 2–6 shows the conversion cards in the cable connecting area.

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF



EITF

HLSF

HLAF

HLSF

HLAF

HLAF

HLAF

EFTF

HWCF

HLSF

Figure 2–6 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABD frame

Table 2–6 lists the ports provided by the conversion cards.

Table 2–6 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABD frame

Card Port name Port type Signal description Relative card

HWCF CLK IN RJ-45

The CLK IN port supports the signal inputs of:

Two channels of 2 MHz clock

One channel of differential 8 K clock

One channel of differential clock selection

NA



2-10


STACK OUT DB-28

The STACK OUT port supports the signal outputs of:

Circuit and loop line test Alarms on the fan frame ESC serial port Narrowband and

broadband RS-485 serial port

Power supply alarm RS-485 serial port of the

fan

HWOUT0 DB-28

The HWOUT0 port provides the following signals about the HABF frame subtended with the HABD frame:

HW Frame header of

narrowband clock Serial port Broadband clock In-position

HWOUT1 DB-28

The HWOUT1 provides the following signals about the HABE frame:

HW Frame header of


HWOUT2 DB-28

The HWOUT2 port provides the following signals about the HABF frame of the HABE frame:

HW Frame header of


EFTF NA DB-68 The EFTF card provides 16 E1 conversion ports or 8 FE conversion ports.

APMB/IPMB/APSB

HLAF NA DB-68

The HLAF card provides one port for transmitting the high speed subtending signal between the HABD and HABF frame.

NA



2-11


HLSF NA DB-68

The HLSF card provides one port for transmitting the high speed subtending signal between the HABD and HABE frame.

NA

E1TF NA DB-68 The E1TF card provides 16 E1 conversion ports.

PVM/PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4

SLTF NA DB-68 The SLTF card provides 32 xSL conversion ports or 16 E1 conversion ports.

AIUB/xSL


The HABD frame provides power supply ports at two sides of the fan tray, as shown in Figure 2–7.

-48 V power supply port+5 V power supply port

-5 V/Ring current power supply port

Figure 2–7 Power supply ports on the HABD frame

Table 2–7 describes the power supply ports on the HABD frame.

Table 2–7 Description of power supply ports on the HABD frame

Port Function Connection

PWRIO-1(+5V) +5 V power supply port Connecting with the inter-frame +5 V power cable

PWRIO(–48V) –48 V power input port Connecting with the –48 V power input cable

PWRIO-2(–5V/RING) –5 V/Ring current power supply port

Connecting with the inter-frame –5 V/Ring current cable



2-12

2.4 HABE Frame

2.4.1 Overview

The HABE frame is the slave frame of the front-access UA5000.

The HABE frame provides 18 slots, and its configuration is as follows:


backup. The TSSB or TSSC card can reside in slot 17 only. There are 14 slots for line cards. Narrowband and broadband line cards can be

intermixed.

2.4.2 Layout

The HABE frame is 10 U high. It can hold the following types of cards.

Table 2–8 Types of cards in the HABE frame

Type Card

ATM Broadband control card APSB






Figure 2–8 shows the HABE frame layout.



2-13

APSB

APSB

PWX

PWX

AIUB/xSL

AIUB/xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

TSSB/xSL

Fan00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

xSL

xSL

Cable routing area

PW

RIO PW

RIOPW

RIO



Figure 2–8 HABE frame layout

In Figure 2–8,

PWX stands for the secondary power supply card. APSB stands for the broadband control card of the HABE. TSSx stands for the test card. xSL stands for the line card

The HABE frame uses the H601HABE backplane.

2.4.3 External Port


Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABE frame through relevant conversion cards. Figure 2–9 shows the conversion cards in the cable connecting area.

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF


SLTF

HLSF

HLAF

HLSF

HLSF

HLAF

HLAF

HLAF

EFTF

HWCF/HWTF

SLTF


Figure 2–9 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABE frame

Table 2–9 lists the ports provided by these conversion cards.



2-14

Table 2–9 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABE frame

Card Port name Port type Signal description

CLK OUT RJ-45 The CLK OUT supports the signal inputs of:

Differential 8 K clock Differential clock selection

STACK OUT DB-28


Circuit and loop line test Alarms on the fan frame Power supply alarm RS-485 serial port of the fan

STACK IN DB-28

The STACK IN port supports the signal inputs of:

Circuit and loop line test Alarms on the fan frame Power supply alarm RS-485 serial port of the fan

HWTF

HWIN DB-28

The HWIN port supports the signal inputs of the HABE frame:

HW Frame header of narrowband clock Serial port Broadband clock In-position

EFTF NA DB-68

The EFTF card provides eight E1 conversion ports or eight FE conversion ports. Its relative card is APSB.

HLAF NA DB-68 The HLAF card provides one port for transmitting high speed subtending signal between the HABD and HABF frame.

HLSF NA DB-68 The HLSF card provides one port for transmitting high speed subtending signal between the HABD and HABE frame.

SLTF NA DB-68 The SLTF card provides 32 xSL conversion ports or 16 E1 conversion ports. Its relative card is xSL.


The HABE frame provides power supply ports at two sides of the frame, as shown in Figure 2–10.



2-15



Figure 2–10 Power supply ports on the HABE frame

Table 2–10 describes the power supply ports on the HABE frame.

Table 2–10 Description of power supply ports on the HABE frame


PWRIO-1(+5V) +5 V power supply port Connecting with the inter-frame +5 V power cable




2.5 HABF Frame

2.5.1 Overview

The HABF frame is the extended frame of the front-access UA5000.

The HABF frame provides 18 line card slots. Narrowband line cards and broadband line cards can be intermixed.

The HABF frame cannot work independently. The HABD or HABE frame provides the power supply for the HABF frame and extends the bus to the HABF frame for management.

2.5.2 Layout

The HABF frame is 10 U high. It can hold the following types of cards.

Table 2–11 Types of cards in the HABF frame

Type Card




2-16

Type Card



Figure 2–11 shows the HABF frame layout.

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

Fan00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

xSL

Cable routing area

PW

RIO

PW

RIOPW

RIO



Figure 2–11 HABF frame layout

In Figure 2–11, "xSL" stands for the line card.

The HABF frame uses the H601HABF backplane.

2.5.3 External Port


Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABF frame through relevant conversion cards. Figure 2–12 shows the conversion cards in the cable connecting area.



2-17

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

HLEF

SLTF

SLTF

SLTF

HLEF

HLEF

HLEF

HWTF

SLTF

Control andinterconnect cableconnecting area


Figure 2–12 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABF frame


Table 2–12 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABF frame


CLKOUT RJ-45

The CLKOUT port supports the signal outputs of:

Differential 8 K clock Differential clock selection

STACK OUT DB-28


Circuit and loop line test Alarms on the fan frame Power supply alarm RS-485 serial interface of the fan

STACK IN DB-28

The STACK IN supports the signal inputs of: Circuit and loop-line test Alarms on the fan frame Power supply alarm RS-485 serial port of the fan

HWTF

HWIN DB-28

The HWIN port supports the following signal inputs about the HABF frame:

HW Frame header of narrowband clock Serial port Broadband clock In-position

HLEF NA DB-68

The HLEF card provides one port for transmitting the high speed subtending signal between the HABD and HABE frames, or between the HABE and HABF frames.



2-18


SLTF NA DB-68 The SLTF card provides 32 xSL conversion ports or 16 E1 conversion ports. Its relative card is xSL.

II. Power supply port

The HABF frame provides power supply ports at two sides of the frame, as shown in Figure 2–13.



Figure 2–13 Power supply ports on the HABF frame

Table 2–13 describes the power supply ports on the HABF frame.

Table 2–13 Description of the power supply ports on the HABF frame


PWRIO-1(+5V) +5 V power port Connecting with the inter-frame +5 V power cable




2.6 HABL Frame

2.6.1 Overview

The HABL frame is a mini master frame of the UA5000.

The HABL frame provides 12 slots, and its configuration is as follows:


backup.



2-19

Two narrowband control cards reside in slots 4 and 5, supporting dual-system hot backup.

There are five slots for line cards. Narrowband and broadband line cards can be intermixed.

Maximum three 32-port broadband and narrowband combo line cards can reside in the HABL frame. Maximum five other line cards can reside in the HABL frame.

The AIUB card can reside in slots 6 and 7 only, and the TSSB or TSSC card can reside in slot 11 only.

2.6.2 Layout

The HABL frame is 10 U high. It can hold the following types of cards.

Table 2–14 Types of cards in the HABL frame

Type Card



Narrowband control card PVU8, PVU4, and PVM








Figure 2–14 shows the HABL frame layout.



2-20

01 0200

FAN

PWX

xSL

xPMB

PVx/RSUx

PWX

xSL

Cable routing area

xPMB

xSL

xSL

xSL

PVx/RSUx

03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11

Cable connecting area

TSSB/TSSC

Figure 2–14 HABL frame layout

In Figure 2–14,

PWX stands for the secondary power card. xPMB can be either the ATM or IP broadband control card. TSSB/TSSC stands for the test card. PVx stands for the narrowband control card. AIUB stands for the ATM interface card. RSUx stands for the remote subscriber unit. xSL stands for the line card.

The HABL frame uses the H601HABL backplane.

Note:


2.6.3 External Port


Cables are connected in the cable connecting area of the HABL frame through relevant conversion cards. Table 2–15 shows the conversion cards in the cable connecting area.



2-21

PSTF

EFTF

E1TF

SLTF0

SLTF1

SLTF2

SLTF3

SLTF4

SLTF5

Figure 2–15 Ports in the cable connecting area of the HABL frame


Table 2–15 Ports provided by the conversion cards of the HABL frame

Card Port type Signal description Relative card

RJ-45 Two environment monitoring serial ports PSTF

3V3 48 V power supply NA

EFTF DB-68 16 E1 conversion ports or eight FE conversion ports APMB/IPMB

E1TF DB-68 16 E1 conversion ports PVM/PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4

SLTF DB-68 32 xSL conversion ports or 16 E1 conversion ports AIUB/xSL

I. Power supply ports

The power supply ports provided by the HABL frame are on the front panel of the PSTF conversion card in the cable connecting area.

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards


3-1

Chapter 3 Introduction to Cards

3.1 About This Chapter This chapter describes the cards used in the UA5000.

3.2 ATM Service Processing Card–H601APMB

3.2.1 Overview

The broadband control card H601APMB is the ATM service processing card. It has the following functions:

Controls the broadband line cards of the UA5000. Provides the broadband switching resources and working clocks. Provides various ports for upstream broadband services. Provides the dual-system hot backup function.

The H601APMB resides in the slot for the broadband control card. The card provides two slots for subcards. One subcard is near the front panel of the H601APMB and the other near the backplane.

Subcards near the front panel include:

155 Mbit/s ATM optical port subcard (providing up to two ATM optical ports) 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical port subcard (providing up to two VP Ring optical ports) ATM E3 subcard (providing up to two E3 ports) ATM T3 subcard (providing up to two T3 ports)

Subcards near the backplane include:

CES subcard (providing up to eight E1 ports) ATM E3 subcard (providing up to two E3 ports) IMA E1 subcard (providing up to eight E1 ports)

3.2.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–1 shows the front panel of the H601APMB card.



3-2

RUN

ACT

RST

ETH

CO

MRunning status LED

Active/Standby LED

Reset button

High speed signal port

APMB

Maintenance Ethernet port

Maintenance serial port

Figure 3–1 Front panel of the H601APMB card

Table 3–1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APMB card.

Table 3–1 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APMB card

Name Status description

RUN 1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card works normally.

ON The card is active. ACT

OFF The card is standby.

Table 3–2 describes the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601APMB card.



3-3

Table 3–2 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601APMB card

Name Function description

RST The button is used to reset the card manually.

COM The port connects to the maintenance terminal for local or remote maintenance. Through tools such as Hyper Terminal, configure the system by using command lines.

ETH The RJ-45 port provides the 10M Base-T semi-duplex network management interface for system maintenance and configuration.


By configuring different subcards, the H601APMB can provide different high speed signal ports.

3.2.3 Subcard

The H601APMB board provides two slots for subcards. The subcards have two types: subcard near the front panel and subcard near the backplane.

Figure 3–2 shows the subcards supported by the H601APMB board.



3-4

Subcards nearthe front panel

155 M opticalsubboard

H601O1CNH

H601O2CNH

H601O2CNG

H601O2CNB

H601CESA

H601E81A

H601E23A

H601E13A

Subcardswhen oneAPMB is

configured

H601V2HAF

H602V2HAF

H601V2HAG

H602V2HAG

H602V2HCF

H602V2HCG

H602V1HAF

H602V1HAG

H602V1HTF

H602V1HTG

H602V1HCF

H602V1HCG

H602V1HEF

H602V1HEGSubcards supported by APM

B

Subcards nearthe backplane

622 M opticalsubboard

Subcardswhen two

APMBs areconfigured

Electricalsubcard

H601E13FH601E23F

H601T13F

H601T23F

Figure 3–2 Subcards supported by the H601APMB board

II. Subcards near the front panel

Table 3–3 lists the subcard providing the 155 Mbit/s optical port. These subcards are used when the UA5000 works as an ONU.



3-5

Table 3–3 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB card (I)

Name Port Interface attribute

H601O1CNH One ATM optical port

Single-mode Wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance: 60 km Port type: SC

H601O2CNH Two ATM optical ports


H601O2CNG Two ATM optical ports


H601O2CNB Two ATM optical ports

Multi-mode Wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance: 2 km Port type: SC

Table 3–4 lists the subcards providing the 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical port. These subcards are used only when one APMB board is configured in a UA5000 frame.

Table 3–4 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (II)

Name Port Port attribute

The following subcards are used in the UA5000 working as the ONU in the VP Ring.

H601V2HAF Two optical ports

Single-mode Central wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance: 15 km Port type: SC

H602V2HAF Two optical ports


H601V2HAG Two optical ports


H602V2HAG Two optical ports


The following subcards are used in the UA5000 working at the OLT side in the VP Ring to provide stratum 3 clock for the VP Ring which adopts the UA5000-only networking mode.



3-6


H602V2HCF Two optical ports


H602V2HCG Two optical ports


Table 3–5 lists the subcards providing the 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical port. These subcards are used when two APMB boards are configured.

Table 3–5 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (III)


The following subcards are used in the UA5000 working as the ONU in the VP Ring.

One optical port


This port is used for the UA5000 to connect with other UA5000 or MD5500 in the VP Ring.

H602V1HAF

One optical port

Multi-mode Central wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance: 2 km Port type: SC

This port is used to connect the active APMB with the standby APMB.

One optical port



H602V1HAG

One optical port



H602V1HTF One optical port Single-mode

Central wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance: 15 km Port type: SC



3-7



One electrical port This port is used to connect the active APMB with the standby APMB.

One optical port



H602V1HTG


The following subcards are used in the UA5000 working at the OLT side in the VP Ring to provide stratum 3 clock for the VP Ring which adopts the pure-UA5000 networking mode.

One optical port


This port is used for the UA5000 to connect with other UA5000 in the VP Ring.

H602V1HCF

One optical port



One optical port



H602V1HCG

One optical port



H602V1HEF One optical port Single-mode

Central wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance: 15 km Port type: SC

This port is used for the UA5000 to connect with



3-8

Name Port Port attribute other UA5000 in the VP Ring.


One optical port



H602V1HEG


Table 3–6 lists the subcards near the front panel.

Table 3–6 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (IV)

Subcard Port

H601E23F Two ATM E3 electrical ports

F601E13F One ATM E3 electrical port

H601T23F Two ATM DS3(T3) electrical ports

H601T13F One ATM DS3(T3) electrical port

III. Description of subcards near the backplane

Table 3–7 lists the subcards near the backplane supported by the H601APMB board.

Table 3–7 Description of subcards supported by the H601APMB board (V)

Subcard Port

H601CESA Eight E1 ports, providing the CES

H601E8IA Eight IMA E1 electrical ports

H601E23A Two ATM E3 electrical ports

H601E13A One ATM E3 electrical port



3-9

IV. DIP switches and jumpers of H601CESA

There are four DIP switches S1–S4 on the H601CESA card. Among them, switches S1 and S4 are used to select the matching impedance of the E1 port, while S2 and S3 are used to set the grounding of the E1 port.

Table 3–8 DIP switches S1 and S4 of the H601CESA card

Switch 75-ohm cable

120-ohm cable Note

S1 ON OFF Bits 1–8 correspond to E1 ports 1–8.

S4 ON OFF

Used for the host query, same with S1. Only Bit 1 is applied, and others are reserved.

Table 3–9 DIP switches S2 and S3 of the H601CESA card

Switch Connected to PGND Suspended Note

S2 ON OFF Used to set E1 ports 1–4.


V. DIP switches and jumpers of H601E8IA

There are five DIP switches S1–S5 on the H601E8IA card.

S1 is used to query the port impedance. The setting shall be consistent with S2 and S4.

S2 and S4 are used to select the matching impedance of the port. The settings of all the eight E1 ports must be the same.

S3 and S5 are used to set the grounding of the E1 port.

Table 3–10 DIP switches S1, S2 and S4 of the H601E8IA card

Switch 75-ohm cable

120-ohm cable Note

S1 ON OFF Only Bit 1 is applied, and others are reserved.





3-10

Table 3–11 DIP switches S3 and S5 of the H601E8IA card

Switch Connected to PGND Suspended Note



Note:

The H601E23A, H601E13A, H601E23F, H601E13F, H601T23F and H601T13F subcards have no DIP switches and jumpers. They only support the 75-ohm port matching impedance.

3.2.4 Pin Assignment Between Card and Backplane

Pins of the H601APMB card have three parts: J1, J2, and J3. The four channels of E1 signals provided by the H601APMB card are defined on J3, as shown in Figure 3–3. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane. For details, see Table 3–12.

1

5

10

15

20

25

a b c d e f g h

J1

J2

J3

J3

Figure 3–3 Pin assignment on the H601APMB card



3-11

Table 3–12 Pin assignment on the H601APMB backplane

Pin row a b c d e f g h

4 E1-1 E1-0

3 E1-3 E1-2

2 E1-5 E1-4

1 E1-7 E1-6

3.3 Broadband Control Card of the Slave Frame–H601APSB

3.3.1 Overview

The H601APSB card is the broadband control card of the slave frame in the UA5000. The H601APSB card supports dual-system hot backup and active/standby switchover. Besides, the H601APSB card supports the multicast services.

3.3.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–4 shows the front panel of the H601APSB card.



3-12

Running status LED

Active/Standby LED

Reset button

RUN

ACT

RST

APSB

Figure 3–4 Front panel of the H601APSB card

Table 3–13 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APSB card.

Table 3–13 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601APSB card


0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is being loaded.

1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card works normally. RUN

ON or OFF The card works abnormally.



The RST button on the front panel of the H601APSB card is used to reset the card manually.



3-13

3.4 IP Service Processing Card–H601IPMB

3.4.1 Overview

The H601IPMB card is the IP service processing card of the UA5000, it has the following functions:

Controls the broadband line cards of the UA5000. Converges and processes various broadband services, such as ADSL, VDSL,

SHDSL and LAN services. Transfer VoIP service of the PVM card. Provides multicast service and dedicated service channels. Transmits IP services upstream through an FE or a GE port. Provides broadband switching resources. Supports the dual-system hot backup. Supports the active/standby switching.

An H601IPMB card provides the following buses and ports:

Twelve LVDS buses to line cards in the master frame Eighteen LVDS buses to line cards in the extended frame Two LVDS multicast LVDS buses to line cards in the slave frame Two FE ports on the backplane to connect with the PVM, which are used to

provide IP channels for VoIP services Four FE ports on the backplane, which can provide LAN services through

conversion cards Two upstream FE ports or two upstream GE ports on the front panel, which are

actually provided by subcards on the H601IPMB card Four FE ports on the backplane, which can provide broadband access services or

be used as upstream ports.

See Figure 3–5 for details.



3-14

IPMB

PVM

PVM

1FE1FE

Backplane

1FE1FE

To line cards in the masterframe (12 LVDS buses)

4 FE ports

2 FE/2 GEupstream ports

To line cards in the extendedframe (18 LVDS buses)

To the slave frame(2 LVDS buses)

To the slave frame(2 multicast buses)

To the extended frame(4 multicast buses)

Figure 3–5 Buses and ports provided by the IPMB card

3.4.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–6 shows the front panel of the H601IPMB card.



3-15

Running status LED

Active/Standby LED

Reset button




RUN

ACT

RST

ETH

CO

M

IPMB

Figure 3–6 Front panel of the H601IPMB card

Table 3–14 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601IPMB card.

Table 3–14 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601IPMB card



OFF The card works abnormally.



Table 3–15 describes the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601IPMB card.



3-16

Table 3–15 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H601IPMB card



By configuring different subcards, the H601IPMB card can provide different Ethernet port, including FE optical/electrical port subcard and GE optical port.

COM RJ-45 port for local or remote maintenance. Through COM, the Hyper Terminal or other tools can configure the system by using command lines.

ETH The RJ-45 port provides the 10M Base-T or 100M Base-T adaptive full-duplex network management interface for system maintenance and configuration.


3.4.3 Subcard

Table 3–16 lists the subcards supported by the H601IPMB card.

Table 3–16 Subcards supported by the H601IPMB card

Subcard Port Port parameter

H601E2FN Two 10/100M Ethernet electrical ports NA

H601O2FNF Two 10/100M Ethernet optical ports

Single-mode Wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance: 15

km Port type: LC

H601O2FNB Two 10/100M Ethernet optical ports

Multi-mode Wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance: 2 km Port type: LC

H601O1FNF One 10/100M Ethernet optical ports


km Port type: LC

H601O1FNB One 10/100M Ethernet optical port

Multi-mode Wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance: 2 km

Port type: LC



3-17

Subcard Port Port parameter

H601O2GNA Two GE optical ports

Multi-mode Wavelength: 850 nm Transmission distance: 500

m Port type: LC

H601O2GNE Two GE optical ports


km Port type: LC

H601O2GNG Two GE optical ports


km Port type: LC

H601O1GNE One GE optical port


km Port type: LC

H601O1GNA One GE optical port

Multi-mode Wavelength: 850 nm Transmission distance: 500

m Port type: LC

H601O1GNG One GE optical port


km Port type: LC


Pins of the H601IPMB card have three parts: J1, J2, and J3. The eight channels of FE signals provided by the H601APMB card are defined on J3, as shown in Figure 3–7. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane. For details, see Table 3–17.



3-18

1

5

10

15

20

25

a b c d e f g h

J1

J2

J3

J3

Figure 3–7 Pin assignment on the H601IPMB card

Table 3–17 Pin assignment on J3 of the H601IPMB backplane

Pin row a b c d e f g h

4 FE-1 FE-0

3 FE-3 FE-2

2 FE-5 FE-4

1 FE-7 FE-6

3.5 Packet Voice Processing Card–AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB

3.5.1 Overview

The AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card is the packet voice processing card. It has the following functions:

Transmits TDM voice signals to LE through the V5 interface. Encapsulates the TDM voice signals into IP packets and transmits them to the

SoftSwitch. Supports 204 voice channels. Manages and communicates with narrowband line cards. Performs the V5 and H.248/MGCP protocol processing.



3-19

The AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card provides four E1 ports through the backplane for access services or narrowband upstream services.

The AG03PVM, AG03PVMCF, and AG03PVMCB cards use different front leading-out ports:

The AG03PVM card uses the 10M Base-T/100 M Base-T network port for upstream services.

The AG03PVMCF card uses the 100 M single-mode optical port for upstream services.

The AG03PVMCB card uses the 100 M multi-mode optical port for upstream services.

When two cards are configured, the two cards work in the active/standby mode, and the voice channels and the E1 ports on the two cards work in the load sharing mode.

3.5.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–8 shows the front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card.

RUN

RESET

Running status LED

Reset button

Optical port

PVMCB

CO

M

Rx

Tx

100BASE-FXMM MODULE

Active/Standby LEDACT


LAN Maintenance network port

Link connection LEDLINK-Fx

RUN

RST Reset button

PVM

CO

M

ACT

LAN

WA

N Servicenetwork port

100BASE-FXSM MODULE

RUN

RESET

PVMCF

CO

M

Rx

Tx

ACT

LAN

LINK-Fx

Figure 3–8 Front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card



3-20

Table 3–18 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card.

Table 3–18 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card


0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card is starting up. RUN

1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card works normally.



ON The link connects normally. LINK-Fx

OFF The link connects abnormally.

Note

The AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card can start up normally only after the PWX card works normally.

Table 3–19 describes the button and the ports on the front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card.

Table 3–19 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card

Name Function description Note

RESET/RST The button is used to reset the card manually. NA

LAN It is used to load the version in the BIOS mode, or view the debugging information channel.

10M Base-T/100M Base-T adaptive full-duplex network port

WAN It is the IP upstream port for voice and control signals.

10M Base-T/100M Base-T network port

100BASE-Fx MM MODULE

It is the IP upstream port for voice and control signals.

One 100 M multi-mode optical port:

Central wavelength: 1310 nm

Transmission distance 2 km

Port type: LC



3-21


100BASE-Fx SM MODULE


One 100 M single-mode optical port:

Central wavelength: 1310 nm

Transmission distance 15 km

Port type: LC

COM

It provides the function for local and remote maintenance. It configures the system in the CLI through software such as HyperTerminal.

RS232 serial port

3.5.3 Jumpers

Figure 3–9 shows the layout of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card.

J6

12

1516

J13

12

1516

Figure 3–9 Layout of the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card

Table 3–20 describes jumpers J6 and J13.

Table 3–20 Settings and meanings of jumpers J6 and J13

Jumper Status description

J6 CLOSE E1 signal is connected to PGND. It is also the factory setting.



3-22


OPEN E1 signal is not connected to PGND.

CLOSE Select the 75-ohm E1 cable. It is also the factory setting. J13

OPEN Select the 120-ohm E1 cable.

In Table 3–20, for jumpers J6 and J13:

"CLOSE" means the following bit pairs are short-circuited: bits 1 and 2, bits 3 and 4, bits 5 and 6, bits 7 and 8, bits 9 and 10, bits 11 and 12, bits 13 and 14, and bits 15 and 16.

"OPEN" means the following bit pairs are not short-circuited: bits 1 and 2, bits 3 and 4, bits 5 and 6, bits 7 and 8, bits 9 and 10, bits 11 and 12, bits 13 and 14, and bits 15 and 16.

The relationship between J6, J13 and E1 is as follows:

Bits 1-2, 3-4 of J6 and J13 correspond to E1 signals of channel 0. Bits 5-6, 7-8 of J6 and J13 correspond to signals of channel 1 E1. Bits 9-10, 11-12 of J6 and J13 correspond to E1 signals of channel 2. Bits 13-14, 15-16 of J6 and J13 correspond to E1 signals of channel 3.

Note:

75-ohm and 120-ohm are the matching impedances of the E1 transmission terminal. For the 75-ohm matching impedance,, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable)

for transmission. For the 120-ohm matching impedance,, use the balanced cable (differential

symmetric pair) for transmission. To select the matching impedance, you need to set the DIP switches correctly and make the data configuration consistent at both ends.


One AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card provides four channels of E1 signals, connected with the 17th–31st rows of pins on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–10. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.

RR0–3: ring of E1 receiving signals of channels 0–3. RT0–3: tip of E1 receiving signals of channels 0–3. TR0–3: ring of E1 transmitting of signals channels 0–3. TT0–3: tip of E1 transmitting of signals channels 0–3.



3-23

Transmitting (Tx) and receiving (Rx) of the E1 signals are discussed at the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB side.

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-

POTS4-POTS5-POTS6-POTS7-

POTS8-POTS9+POTS9-POTS10+POTS10-POTS11+POTS11-POTS12+POTS12-

POTS13-POTS14+POTS14-POTS15+POTS15-

RR0

TR0

RR1

TR1

RR2

TR2

RR3

TR3

RT0

TT0

RT1

TT1

RT2

TT2

RT3

TT3

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–10 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB card

3.6 Packet Voice Processing Card–H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG

3.6.1 Overview

The H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card is the packet voice processing card. It has the following functions:

Transmits TDM voice signals to LE through the V5 interface. Encapsulates the TDM voice signals into IP packets and transmits them to the

SoftSwitch. Supports 500 voice channels. Manages and communicates with narrowband line cards in the UA5000 frame. Performs the V5 and H.248/MGCP protocol processing.

The H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card provides four E1 ports through the backplane for access services or narrowband upstream services.



3-24

The H601PVMB, H601PVMBB, H601PVMBF, and H601PVMBG cards use different front leading-out ports:

The H601PVMB card uses the 10/100 M Base-T network for upstream services. The H601PVMBB card uses the 100 M multi-mode optical port for upstream

services. The H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card uses the 100 M single-mode optical port for

upstream services.

When two cards are configured, the two cards work in the active/standby mode, and the voice channels and the E1 ports on the two cards work in the load sharing mode.

3.6.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–11 shows the front panel of the H601PVMB card.

RST Reset button

PVMB


CO

MLA

N Maintenance network port

WA

N

Service network port

RUN Running status LED


Figure 3–11 Front panel of the H601PVMB card

Figure 3–12shows the front panel of the

H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card.



3-25

RUN

RST

Running Status LED

Reset button

Optical port

PVMBG

Rx

Tx

100BASE-FXSM MODULE


Link connection LEDLINK-Fx

Link connection LEDACT-Fx

CO

M Maintenance serial port

LAN Maintenance network cable

RUN

RST

PVMBB

CO

M

Rx

Tx

100BASE-FXMM MODULE

ACT

LINK-Fx

ACT-Fx

LAN

RUN

RST

PVMBF

CO

MRx

Tx

100BASE-FXSM MODULE

ACT

LINK-Fx

ACT-Fx

LAN

Figure 3–12 Front panel of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card

Table 3–21 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card.

Table 3–21 Description of the LEDS on the front panel of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card


0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card is starting up. RUN




ON The link connects normally. LINK-Fx

OFF The link connects abnormally.



3-26


Blinking Communication of the link is normal. ACT-Fx

OFF The link has no communication.

Note:

The H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card can start up normally only after the PWX card works normally.

Table 3–22 describes the ports and the button on the front panel of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card.

Table 3–22 Description of the ports and the button on the front panel of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card


LAN It is used to load the version in the BIOS mode, or view the debugging information channel.

10 M Base-T/100 M Base-T adaptive full-duplex network port

WAN It is the IP upstream port for voice and control signals.

10 M Base-T/100 M Base-T network port

100BASE-Fx MM MODULE


One 100 M multi-mode optical port: Central wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance 2 km Port type: LC

100BASE-Fx SM MODULE


One 100 M single-mode optical port: Central wavelength: 1310 nm Transmission distance 15 km (H601PVMBF) Transmission distance 40 km (H601PVMBG) Port type: LC



3-27


COM

It provides the function for local and remote maintenance. It configures the system in the CLI through software such as HyperTerminal.

RS232 serial port

RST The button is used to reset the card manually. NA

3.6.3 Jumpers

The H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card provides two jumpers J6 and J7, as shown in Figure 3–13.

J7

1

2

15

16

J616 15

2 1

Figure 3–13 Layout of the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card

Table 3–23 describes jumpers J6 and J7.

Table 3–23 Settings and meanings of jumpers J6 and J7 on the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card


CLOSE E1 signal is connected to PGND. It is also the factory setting. J6

OPEN E1 signal is not connected to PGND.



3-28


CLOSE Select the 75-ohm E1 cable. It is also the factory setting. J7

OPEN Select the 120-ohm E1 cable.

In Table 3–23, for jumpers J6 and J7:

"CLOSE" means the following bit pairs are short-circuited: bits 1 and 2, bits 3 and 4, bits 5 and 6, bits 7 and 8, bits 9 and 10, bits 11 and 12, bits 13 and 14, and bits 15 and 16.

"OPEN" means the following bit pairs are not short-circuited: bits 1 and 2, bits 3 and 4, bits 5 and 6, bits 7 and 8, bits 9 and 10, bits 11 and 12, bits 13 and 14, and bits 15 and 16.

The relationship between J6, J7 and E1 is as follows:

Bits 1-2, 3-4 of J6 and J7 correspond to E1 channel 0. Bits 5-6, 7-8 of J6 and J7 correspond to E1 channel 1. Bits 9-10, 11-12 of J6 and J7 correspond to E1 channel 2. Bits 13-14, 15-16 of J6 and J7 correspond to E1 channel 3.

Note:

75-ohm and 120-ohm are the matching impedances of the E1 transmission terminal. For the 75-ohm matching impedance, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable)

for transmission. For the 120-ohm matching impedance, use the balanced cable (differential

symmetric pair) for transmission. To select the matching impedance, you need to set the DIP switches correctly and make the data configuration consistent at both ends.


One H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card provides four channels of E1 signals, connected with the 17th–31st rows of pins of upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–14. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.

RR0–3: ring of E1 receiving signals of channels 0–3. RT0–3: tip of E1 receiving signals of channels 0–3. TR0–3: ring of E1 transmitting of signals channels 0–3. TT0–3: tip of E1 transmitting of signals channels 0–3.



3-29

Transmitting (Tx) and receiving (Rx) of the E1 signals are discussed at the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/ H601PVMBG side.

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-




RR0

TR0

RR1

TR1

RR2

TR2

RR3

TR3

RT0

TT0

RT1

TT1

RT2

TT2

RT3

TT3

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–14 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PVMBG card

3.7 V5 Interface Processing Unit–H601PVU8/H601PVU4

3.7.1 Overview

The H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card is the V5 interface processing unit.

As the control card of the narrowband service, the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card has the following functions:

Controls the narrowband line cards in the same frame or the extended frame. Provides the upstream E1 port, switching resources and working clock for

narrowband services. Supports up to five extended frames. Supports the active/standby mode and the dual-system hot backup working mode

to make the system more reliable.

The E1 ports do not work in the active/standby mode. When two H601PVU8/H601PVU4 cards are used, the number of E1 ports available is doubled.



3-30

One H601PVU8 card provides eight E1 ports, while one H601PVU4 card provides four E1 ports. Both provide eight 2 Mbit/s HWs to connect with the line cards in the same frame, and ten 8 Mbit/s HWs to connect with up to five extended frames. When two H601PVU8/H601PVU4 cards work together, they provide 16 E1 ports, eight 2 Mbit/s HWs, and ten 8 Mbit/s HWs.

Through these E1 ports, the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card can interconnect or subtend with a Local Exchange (LE), an OLT or an ONU.

Through the NM serial port the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card provides, you can configure the card through a command line terminal or a network management system (NMS).

3.7.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–15 shows the front panels of the H601PVU8 and the H601PVU4 cards.

Running status LED

Reset button

Maintenance serial portDIP switch


Active/Standby LED for card clock

Port status LED

Port link status LEDCommunication link status LED for active and standby cardsNM serial port status LEDE1 link status LEDCommunication LED for master and slave nodesEthernet port status LED

RUN

CLK

RST

PVU8

V5S

V5L

MSL

COM

E1S

NOD

ETN

CO

MET

H

RUN

CLK

RST

PVU4

V5S

V5L

MSL

COM

E1S

NOD

ETN

CO

MET

H

Figure 3–15 Front panels of the H601PVU8 and the H601PVU4 cards

Table 3–24 describes the LEDs on the front panels of the H601PVU8 and the H601PVU4 cards.



3-31

Table 3–24 Descriptions of the LEDs on the front panels of the H601PVU8 and the H601PVU4 cards


1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The active card is normal.

0.1s ON and 1.9s OFF repeatedly The standby card is normal.

1.9s ON and 0.1s OFF repeatedly

Smooth switching from standby mode to active mode.


The system is being loaded, or the active-standby mode is not yet determined.

RUN

Blinking at an interval of less than 0.25S repeatedly

The loading program is being decompressed.

ON The card clock is active. CLK

OFF The card clock is standby.

(Active card) ON All interfaces are normal.

(Active card) OFF All interfaces are abnormal.

(Active card) blinking Some interfaces are abnormal. If there are more abnormal interfaces, the blinking frequency is higher.

V5S

For the standby card, it is constantly OFF.

The V5S of the standby card has no other states.

(Active card) ON All links are normal.

(Active card) OFF All links are abnormal.

(Active card) blinking Some links are abnormal. If there are more abnormal links, the blinking frequency is higher.

V5L

For the standby card, it is constantly OFF.

The V5L of the standby card has no other states.

1.9s ON and 0.1s OFF repeatedly Links are normal.

MSL OFF Links are abnormal.

ON Communication with the configuration terminal is normal.

COM OFF Communication with the configuration

terminal is abnormal.

E1S ON The E1 link is normal.



3-32


OFF The E1 link frame is out of synchronization or loses carrier.

0.9s ON and 0.1s OFF repeatedly Bit slip.

0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly Remote frame is out of synchronization.

0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly Failed to communicate with the host.

NOD 1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly Start to run normally after configuration.

ETN ON The network port is receiving data.

Note:

The H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card can start up normally only after the PWX card works normally.

Table 3–25 describes the button, the switch, and the ports on the front panel of the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card.

Table 3–25 Description of the button, the switch, and the ports on the front panel of the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card

Name Status description Note

RST The button is used to reset the card manually. NA

DIP switch

It specifies the E1S LED to indicate the status of a specific E1 link. ON indicates the binary number of the bit is 1 and OFF 0. The first E1 link corresponding to bits 1–3 is 000, and the eighth E1 link corresponding to bits 1–3 is 111.

The first three bits are used. The fourth is reserved.

COM

The RJ-45 socket provides the function for local and remote maintenance. It configures the system in the CLI through software such as HyperTerminal.

RS-232 serial port

ETH The RJ-45 socket provides the 10 M Base-T network management port for system maintenance and configuration.

10 M Base-T half-duplex Ethernet port



3-33

3.7.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers

I. DIP switches

When the system runs normally, the setting of the DIP switch on the front panel specifies the E1 port whose status is to be displayed by the E1S LED. See Table 3–26 for details, where 0 stands for OFF and 1 for ON.

Table 3–26 Setting of the DIP switch of the H601PVU8/H601PVU4 card

DIP switch (321) E1 port number

000 1

001 2

010 3

011 4

100 5

101 6

110 7

111 8

Figure 3–16 shows the layout of the H601PVU8 card.

H601PVU8

J14

J16

J15

J13

Figure 3–16 Layout of the H601PVU8 card



3-34

II. Jumpers J14 and J16

Jumpers J14 and J16 are used to specify whether to ground the shielding layer of the E1 Tx end. Table 3–27 lists their settings and meanings.


Setting Meaning

ON PGND

OFF NC

III. Jumpers J13 and J15

Jumpers J13 and J15 are used to set the line matching impedance of the E1 Rx end. Table 3–28 lists their settings and meanings.


Setting Meaning

ON 75-ohm

OFF 120-ohm

75-ohm and 120-ohm are the matching impedances of the E1 transmission terminal.

For the 75-ohm matching impedance, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable) for transmission.

For the 120-ohm matching impedance, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric pair) for transmission.

In selecting the matching impedance, you need to set the DIP switches correctly and make the data configuration consistent at both ends.


The eight channels of E1 signals provided by the H601PVU8 card are connected with the 17th–32nd rows of pins, as shown in Figure 3–17. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane. Where, the four channels of E1 signals provided by the H601PVU4 card are the first four channels of E1 signals provided by the H601PVU8 card.

The characters in Figure 3–17 are described as follows:

R1-R: ring of channel 1 E1 receiving signals. R1-T: tip of channel 1 E1 receiving signals. T1-R: ring of channel 1 E1 transmitting signals. T1-T: tip of channel 1 E1 transmitting signals.



3-35

I1BI1A I1C65

666768

69707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687

8889

9091

9293

949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46

4748

49505152535455

5657

5859

6061

626364

1

234

5678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920

212223

2425

2627

2829

303132

R1-RR5-RT1-RT5-RR2-RR6-RT2-RT6-RR3-RR7-R

T3-R

T7-RR4-R

R8-RT4-R

T8-R

R1-TR5-TT1-TT5-TR2-TR6-TT2-TT6-TR3-TR7-T

T3-T

T7-TR4-T

R8-TT4-T

T8-T

Figure 3–17 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601PVU8 card

3.8 Remote Subscriber Processing Card–H601RSU8/H601RSU4

3.8.1 Overview

The H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card is the remote subscriber processing card. It has the following functions:

Controls the narrowband line cards in the remote subscriber frame. Implements the subtending of narrowband services with the UA5000 master frame

or the MD5500 frame. Provides upstream E1 ports for the narrowband services.

The H601RSU8 or the H601RSU4 is often used in pairs. Two H601RSU8 or H601RSU4 cards work in the active/standby mode to enhance the system reliability. The E1 ports do not support the active/standby switchover. When two cards are configured, the number of the E1 ports provided doubles.

One H601RSU8 card provides eight E1 ports, eight 2M HWs for the line cards in this frame, and ten 8M HWs for up to five extended frames. When two H601RSU8 cards work together, they provide 16 E1 ports, eight 2M HWs and ten 8M HWs.



3-36

An H601RSU4 card provides four E1 ports. Other specifications are the same as those of the H601RSU8 card.

3.8.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–18 shows the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card.

RUN

CLK

RSU8

V5S

V5L

MSL

COM

E1S

NOD

ETN

RUN

CLK

RSU4

V5S

V5L

MSL

COM

E1S

NOD

ETN

Running status LED

Reset button

Maintenance serial portDIP switch

Active/Standby LED for card clock

Port status LED

Port link status LEDCommunication link status LED for active and standby cardsCommunication link status LED for foreground and backgroundE1 link status LEDCommunication LED for master and slave nodes

Ethernet port status LED

Figure 3–18 Front panel of H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card

Table 3–29 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card.



3-37

Table 3–29 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card


1S ON and 1S OFF repeatedly The active card is normal.

0.1S ON and 1.9S OFF repeatedly The standby card is normal.

1.9S ON and 0.1S OFF repeatedly Smooth switching from standby mode to active mode.

0.25S ON and 0.25S OFF repeatedly

The system is being loaded, or the active-standby mode is not yet determined.

RUN

Blinking at an interval of less than 0.25S

The loading program is being decompressed.

ON The card clock is active. CLK

OFF The card clock is standby.

V5S Reserved NA

V5L Reserved NA

1.9S ON and 0.1S OFF repeatedly Links are normal. MSL

OFF Links are abnormal.

COM Reserved NA

ON The E1 link is normal.

OFF The E1 link frame is out of synchronization or loses carrier.

0.9S ON and 0.1 OFF repeatedly Bit slip.

E1S Note: The DIP switch on the front panel decides to display the E1 status of a specific channel. 0.5S ON and 0.5 OFF repeatedly Remote frame is out of

synchronization.

0.25S ON and 0.25S OFF repeatedly Failed to communicate with the host.

NOD 1S ON and 1S OFF repeatedly Start to run normally after

configuration.

ETN Reserved NA

Table 3–30 describes the button, the switch, and the ports on the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card.



3-38

Table 3–30 Description of the button, the switch, and the ports on the front panel of the H601RSU8/H601RSU4 card


Reset button The button is used to reset the card manually.

DIP switch

It specifies the E1S LED to indicate the status of a specific E1 link.The first three bits are used. The fourth is reserved. ON indicates the binary number of the bit is 1 and OFF 0. The first E1 link corresponding to bits 1–3 is 000, and the eighth E1 link corresponding to bits 1–3 is 111.

Debug serial port RJ-45 connector and RS-232 serial port

Maintenance network port RJ-45 connector and 10M Base-T semi-duplex network port.


I. DIP switches

When the system runs normally, the setting of the DIP switch on the front panel specifies the E1 port whose status is to be displayed by the E1S LED. See Table 3–31 for details, where 0 stands for OFF and 1 for ON.

Table 3–31 Setting of the DIP switch of the H601RSU8 card

DIP switch (321) E1 port number

000 1

001 2

010 3

011 4

100 5

101 6

110 7

111 8

Figure 3–19 shows the layout of the H601RSU8 card.



3-39

H601RSU8

J14

J16

J15

J13

Figure 3–19 Layout of the H601RSU8 card

II. Jumpers J14 and J16

Jumpers J14 and J16 are used to specify whether to ground the shielding layer of the E1 Tx end. Table 3–32 lists their settings and meanings.


Setting Meaning

ON PGND

OFF NC

III. Jumpers J13 and J15

Jumpers J13 and J15 are used to set the line matching impedance of the E1 Rx end. Table 3–33 lists their settings and meanings.


Setting Meaning

ON 75-ohm

OFF 120-ohm




3-40



In selecting the matching impedance, you need to set the DIP switches correctly and make the data configuration consistent at both ends.


The eight channels of E1 signals provided by the H601RSU8 card are connected with the 17th–32nd rows of pins, as shown in Figure 3–20. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane. Where, the four channels of E1 signals provided by the H601RSU4 card are the first four channels of E1 signals provided by the H601RSU8 card.

The characters in Figure 3–20 are described as follows:

R1-R: ring of channel 1 E1 receiving signals. R1-T: tip of channel 1 E1 receiving signals. T1-R: ring of channel 1 E1 transmitting signals. T1-T: tip of channel 1 E1 transmitting signals.

I1BI1A I1C65

666768

69707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687

8889

9091

9293

949596

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46

4748

49505152535455

5657

5859

6061

626364

1

234

5678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920

212223

2425

2627

2829

303132

R1-RR5-RT1-RT5-RR2-RR6-RT2-RT6-RR3-RR7-R

T3-R

T7-RR4-R

R8-RT4-R

T8-R

R1-TR5-TT1-TT5-TR2-TR6-TT2-TT6-TR3-TR7-T

T3-T

T7-TR4-T

R8-TT4-T

T8-T

Figure 3–20 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601RSU8 card



3-41

3.9 Remote Subscriber Processing Card–H602RSUG (2G.SHDSL)

3.9.1 Overview

The H602RSUG card is the main control unit in the ONU-60A subscriber frame. It has the following features:

Forwards signaling of the master/slave node. Manages the slave node. Connects with the G.SHDSL port of the H601SDLT card at the central office. Provides four TTL HWs for the two subscriber cards in the ONU-60A subscriber

frame, of which, two TTL HWs are allocated for each card. Provides upstream connection for the two subscriber cards through its G.SHDSL

ports.

3.9.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–21 shows the front panel of the H602RSUG card.



3-42

RST

RSUG

Communication LED for master and slave nodes

Running status LED

Reset button


Communication link status LED

Reserved LED

2M service sattus LEDs

RUN

LINK

WAN1

E1

NOD

WAN2

Figure 3–21 Front panel of the H602RSUG card

Table 3–34 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H602RSUG card.

Table 3–34 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602RSUG card

Name Meaning Description

0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly Working is abnormal.

RUN 1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly Working is normal.

ON Communication is normal.


Communication with the control card has not been set up. NOD

1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly

The card starts working after being configured.

LINK ON Communication with the upper layer equipment is normal.



3-43

Name Meaning Description

OFF Communication with the upper layer equipment is abnormal.

ON The link is normal. WAN1 and WAN2 OFF The link is abnormal.

ON E1 is normal. E1

OFF E1 is abnormal.

Table 3–35 describes the button and the port on the front panel of the H602RSUG card.

Table 3–35 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H602RSUG card


Reset button The button is used to reset the card manually.

Debug serial port

RS-232 serial port and RJ-45 connector, used for debugging and printing.


The H602RSUG card provides two G.SHDSL ports, as shown in Figure 3–23.

Table 3–36 describes the characters in the following figures.

Table 3–36 Description of characters in the following figures

Character Meaning

GND Ground

+5V +5 V power supply

R- TIP/RING Receiving of E1 signals

T- TIP/RING Transmitting of E1 signals

HUHW0–HUHW3 and HDHW0–HDHW3

For TTL HWs of the service card. In the ONU-60A subscriber frame, HW0 and HW2 are allocated to the first service card, and HW1 and HW3 are allocated to the second service card.

LINEA0 and LINEB0 The first G.SHDSL port

LINEA2 and LINEB2 The second G.SHDSL port

Figure 3–22 and Figure 3–23 show the pin assignment between the H602RSUG card and the backplane. It is the front view of the backplane.



3-44

POTS2+PGNDPOTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

+5V

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-


POTS8+POTS8-POTS9+POTS9-POTS10+POTS10-POTS11+POTS11-


+5VDGNDDGND

PGND

+5V+5VPGNDPGND

R-RING

T-RING

PGND

R-TIP

T-TIP

Figure 3–22 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H602RSUG card



3-45

HDHW1POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-




DGNDPGND_1

PGND

HUHW2HDHW2HUHW3HDHW3

LINEA2LINEB2

PGND_1

HUHW0HDHW0HUHW1

DGNDPGND_1

LINEA0LINEB0

Figure 3–23 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H602RSUG card

3.10 ATM Port Card–H601AIUB

3.10.1 Overview

The H601AIUB card is the ATM port card and resides in the slot for the interface card. The H601AIUB card provides two slots for subcards.

The slot at the front panel side supports:

155 Mbit/s ATM optical port subcard, providing up to two ATM optical ports. ATM E3 subcard, providing up to two E3 ports.

The slot at backplane side supports:

ATM E3 subcard, providing up to two E3 ports. IMA E1 subcard, providing up to eight E1 ports.

3.10.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–24 shows the front panel of the H601AIUB card.



3-46

Running status LED

Active/Standby LED

Reset button

Signal port

RUN

ACT

RST

AIUB

Figure 3–24 Front panel of the H601AIUB card

Table 3–37 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601AIUB card.

Table 3–37 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601AIUB card


0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card works normally. RUN

1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The system is starting.



Table 3–38 describes the button and the port on the front panel of the H601AIUB card.



3-47

Table 3–38 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H601AIUB card



Signal port

The front panel of the H601AIUB has slots for optical ports, you can configure one to two 155 Mbit/s subcards if necessary.

3.10.3 Subcard

Table 3–39 lists the subcards on the H601AIUB card.

Table 3–39 Subcards on the H601AIUB card

Name Port Description

H601O1CNH One 155 Mbit/s ATM optical port Single-mode, 60 km, SC.

H601O2CNH Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical port Single-mode, 60 km, SC.

H601O1CNG One 155 Mbit/s ATM optical port Single-mode, 30 km, SC.

H601O1CNB One 155 Mbit/s ATM optical port Multi-mode, 2 km, SC.

H601O2CNG Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical ports Single-mode, 30 km, SC.

H601O2CNB Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical ports Multi-mode, 2 km, SC.

H601E8IA Eight IMA E1 electrical ports Subcard near the H601AIUB backplane

H601E23A Two ATM E3 electrical ports Subcard near the H601AIUB backplane

H601E13A One ATM E3 electrical port Subcard near the H601AIUB backplane

H601E23F Two ATM E3 electrical ports Subcard near the H601AIUB backplane

H601E13F One ATM E3 electrical port Subcard near the H601AIUB backplane

Five sets of DIP switches S1–S5 on the H601E8IA subcard are used to distinguish the cable type, as shown in Table 3–40.



3-48

Table 3–40 Description of DIP switches of the H601E8IA subcard

Switch 75-ohm cable 120-ohm cable

S1 ON for Bits 1–4 OFF for Bits 1–4






The eight channels of E1 signals provided by the H601AIUB card are separately connected with the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER and the 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–25 and Figure 3–26. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.

The characters in Figure 3–25 and Figure 3–26 are described as follows:

RR1–8: ring of channels 1–8 E1 signals (receiving at the H601AIUB side). RT1–8: tip of channel 1–8 E1 signals (receiving at the H601AIUB side). TR1–8: ring of channels 1–8 E1 signals (transmitting at the H601AIUB side). TT1–8: tip of channel 1–8 E1 signals (transmitting at the H601AIUB side).



3-49

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-


POTS8-POTS9+POTS9-POTS10+POTS10-POTS11+POTS11-

POTS12+POTS12-


RT1

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

TT1RT2TT2RT3TT3RT4TT4

RR1TR1RR2TR2RR3TR3RR4TR4

Figure 3–25 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601AIUB card



3-50

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

RT5TT5RT6TT6RT7TT7RT8TT8


Figure 3–26 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601AIUB card

3.11 16-Port E1 Port Card–H601EDTB

3.11.1 Overview

The H601EDTB card is the 16-port E1 port card. The 16 E1 ports can provide upstream services and access services.

3.11.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–27 shows the front panel of the H601EDTB card.



3-51

EDTB

Running mode LEDMODE

RUN Running status LED

Figure 3–27 Front panel of the H601EDTB card

Table 3–41 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EDTB card.

Table 3–41 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EDTB card




ON The card works in standalone mode.MODE

OFF The card works in other mode.

3.11.3 Jumpers

There are two sets of jumpers and one set of pins on the H601EDTB card.

See Figure 3–28 for details.



3-52

115 16

2J600

115 16

2J800

115 16

2J900

115 16

2J700

19 10

2

J203

1 15

162J501

115

16 2

J502

Figure 3–28 Layout of the H601EDTB card

Table 3–42 describes settings of the jumpers.

Table 3–42 Settings of the jumpers on the H601EDTB card

Jumper Meaning

J600, J700, J800, and J900

Used to set the matching impedance of E1. CLOSE: 75-ohm. It is also the factory setting. OPEN: 120-ohm.

J501 and J502

Used to set whether the ring of the 75-ohm E1 signal at the transmitting side is grounded or not.

CLOSE: grounded. OPEN: not grounded. It is also the factory setting.

Note:

In Table 3–42, CLOSE means bits 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12, 13-14, and 15-16 are

short-circuited. OPEN means bits 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8, 9-10, 11-12, 13-14, and 15-16 are not

short-circuited.

Table 3–43 shows the relationship between pins of J600/J700/J800/J900 and E1 signals.



3-53

Table 3–43 Relationship between pins of J600/J700/J800/J900 and E1 signals

Jumper Pins Corresponding E1 signals

J600 1-2 and 3-4 The 1st channel

J600 5-6 and 7-8 The 2nd channel

J600 9-10 and 11-12 The 3rd channel

J600 13-14 and 15-16 The 4th channel













Table 3–43 shows the relationship between pins of J501/J502 and E1 signals.

Table 3–44 Relationship between pins of J501/J502 and E1 signals


J501 1-2 The 1st channel

J501 3-4 The 2nd channel

J501 5-6 The 3rd channel

J501 7-8 The 4th channel










3-54







Note:

75-ohm and 120-ohm are the matching impedance of the E1 transmission terminal. In general, for the 75-ohm matching impedance, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable). For the 120-ohm matching impedance, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric cable pair). To select the matching impedance, ensure that the DIP switch is set correctly and the data is consistent.

Pins of J203 define an RS232 maintenance serial port with the baud rate 9,600 bit/s.

Table 3–45 describes J203.

Table 3–45 Definition of pins of J203

Pin Meaning

1 Reserved

2 Data receiving

3 Data transmitting

4 GND

5–10 Reserved


The H601EDTB card provides 16 E1 ports, which are distributed to pin rows 1–16 on the upper HEADER and pin rows 17–32 on the lower HEADER.

See Figure 3–29 and Figure 3–30 for details. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.

The symbols in Figure 3–29 and Figure 3–30 are described as follows:

RR0–15: ring of E1 receiving signals of channels 0–15 RT0–15: tip of E1 receiving signals of channels 0–15 TR0–15: ring of E1 transmitting signals of channels 0–15



3-55

TT0–15: tip of E1 transmitting signals of channels 0–15

Receiving and transmitting of E1 signals are at the H601EDTB side.

RT1TT1 1

234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

RT2TT2RT3TT3RT4TT4


RR9RT9TR9TT9RR10RT10TR10TT10RR11RT11TR11TT11RR12RT12TR12TT12

Figure 3–29 Pin assignment of the H601EDTB card (upper HEADER)



3-56

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596



RT5TT5RT6TT6RT7TT7RT8TT8

Figure 3–30 Pin assignment of the H601EDTB card (lower HEADER)

3.12 16-Port ADSL Line Card–H601ADLB

3.12.1 Overview

The H601ADLB card is the 16-port ADSL line card with the built-in splitter, and is suitable for ADSL over POTS.

The splitter has the following functions:

Separates the POTS signals from the ADSL signals on the subscriber cable. Sends the POTS signals to the ASL card for processing. Sends the ADSL signals to AC5 chipset for processing.

In converse, the POTS and ADSL signals are sent to the loop line after reassembled through the splitter.

3.12.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED in the front panel of the H601ADLB card, as described in Table 3–46.



3-57

Table 3–46 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601ADLB card



ON or OFF The card is abnormal.


Figure 3–31 shows the layout of the H601ADLB card.

H601ADLB

S5

Figure 3–31 Layout of the H601ADLB card

Table 3–47 Settings of DIP switch of the H601ADLB card


Close The card is enabled to load the software. S5

Open The card is disabled from loading the software. It is also the factory setting.



3-58

Note:

For jumper S5: Close means two bits are short-circuited. Open means two bits are not short-circuited.


Figure 3–32 and Figure 3–33 show the pin assignment between the H601ADLB card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.

Where,

The 16 channels of ADSL signals are connected with the 1st–16th pin rows on the upper HEADER.

The 16 channels of POTS signals are connected with the 17th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER.

The numbers in Figure 3–32 and Figure 3–33 are the port serial numbers.

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

A8B8A9B9A10B10A11B11A12B12A13B13A14B14A15B15

B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–32 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ADLB card



3-59

POTS0-

POTS4-

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

POTS8+POTS9+POTS10+POTS11+POTS12+POTS13+POTS14+POTS15+

POTS8-POTS9-POTS10-POTS11-POTS12-POTS13-POTS14-POTS15-


POTS4-POTS4+

POTS5+POTS5-POTS6+POTS6-POTS7+POTS7-

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–33 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ADLB card

Connect the subscriber cables as follows.

Connect the 16 ADSL subscriber cables to the A1 to A8, B1 to B16, and C1 to C8 rows of pins on the upper HEADER.

Connect the 16 POTS subscriber cables to the A25 to A32, B49 to B64 and C25 to C32 rows of pins on the lower HEADER.

3.13 16-Port ADSL Line Card–H601ADLF

3.13.1 Overview

The H601ADLF card is the 16-port ADSL line card with the built-in splitter, and is suitable for ADSL over ISDN.

The H601ADLF card supports the test of 16 pairs of ADSL subscriber cables through the broadband test card.

3.13.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601ADLF card, as described in Table 3–48.



3-60

Table 3–48 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601ADLF card




0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF repeatedly The card is not registered. RUN

2s ON and 2s OFF repeatedly The card is registered, but the firmware is not loaded.


Figure 3–34 shows the layout of the H601ADLF card.

H601ADLF

S5

Figure 3–34 Layout of the H601ADLF card

Table 3–49 Settings of jumper of the H601ADLF card


Close The card software can be loaded through the serial port.S5

Open The card software cannot be loaded through the serial port. It is also the factory setting.



3-61

Note:

For jumper S5: Close means two bits are short-circuited. Open means two bits are not short-circuited.


Figure 3–35 and Figure 3–36 show the pin assignment between the H601ADLF card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.

Where,




POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7


B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–35 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ADLF card



3-62

POTS0-

POTS4-

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R




POTS4-POTS4+


123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–36 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ADLF card

3.14 16-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card–H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI

3.14.1 Overview

The H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card is the 16-port ADSL/ADSL 2+ line card with the built-in splitter. The H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card provides the ADSL broadband access services, and the ADSL broadband access services are transmitted to the ATM network or IP network through the control card.

The differences between the H602ADMB, H602ADMC, and H602ADMI cards are as follows:

The H602ADMB card does not support the circuit and loop line test. The H602ADMI/H602ADMC card supports the circuit and loop line test and port

backup.

3.14.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card, as described in Table 3–50.



3-63

Table 3–50 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card


0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is powered on. RUN



Figure 3–37 and Figure 3–38 show the pin assignment between the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.

Where,




POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-




T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7


B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–37 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card



3-64

POTS2+

POTS0-

POTS4-

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R




POTS4-POTS4+


123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–38 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI card

In Figure 3–37 and Figure 3–38:

A0 (B0)-A15 (B15) connect with port signal cables 0–15 of ADSL subscribers. POTS 0-POTS 15 connect with port signal cables 0–15 of PSTN subscribers.

3.15 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card–H603ADRB

3.15.1 Overview

The H603ADRB card is the 32-port ADSL/ADSL2+ line card.

The H603ADRB card has the following features:

It has the built-in splitter. It communicates with the broadband control card through the backplane. The

control card provides upstream broadband service ports for ATM or IP services. It provides POTS services to the voice card through the DB68 port on the front

panel.

3.15.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–39 shows the front panel of the H603ADRB card.



3-65

Running status LEDRUN

ADRB

Figure 3–39 Front panel of the H603ADRB card

Table 3–51 describes the LED on the front panel of the H603ADRB card.

Table 3–51 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603ADRB card


0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card is powered on and performs self-test. RUN

1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card is normal.

The D-type connector (68-pin, male) on the front panel provides the 32-channel POTS port to the voice card.


Figure 3–40 shows the layout of the jumpers of the H603ADRB card.



3-66

H603ADRB

S1

Figure 3–40 Layout of the jumpers of the H603ADRB card

Table 3–52 describes settings of jumper S1 of the H603ADRB card.

Table 3–52 Settings of jumper S1 of the H603ADRB card




Note:

Settings of jumper S1: CLOSE: short-circuit the jumpers. OPEN: switch off the jumpers.


Figure 3–41 and Figure 3–42 show the pin assignment between the H603ADRB card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.





3-67

Connect 16 subscriber cables to the 1st–16th pin rows on the upper HEADER. Connect the rest 16 subscriber cables to the 17th–32nd pin rows on the lower

HEADER.

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7


B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

Figure 3–41 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603ADRB card



3-68

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-


POTS8-POTS9+POTS9-POTS10+

POTS11+POTS11-

POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A24

A16B16

A25A26A27A28A29A30A31

B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31

A17B17A18B18A19B19A20B20A21B21

A22B22A23B23

Figure 3–42 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603ADRB card

3.16 32-Port ADSL/ADSL2+ Line Card–H605ADRB

3.16.1 Overview

The H605ADRB card is the 32-port ADSL/ADSL2+ line card.

The H605ADRB card has the following features:

It has the built-in splitter It supports the circuit and loop line test. It supports the port backup. It communicates with the broadband control card through the backplane. The

control card provides upstream broadband service ports for ATM or IP services. It transmits the POTS service to the voice card through the DB68 socket on the

front panel.

3.16.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–43 shows the front panel of the H605ADRB card.



3-69

Running status LEDRUN

ADRB

Figure 3–43 Front panel of the H605ADRB card

Table 3–53 describes the LED on the front panel of the H605ADRB card.

Table 3–53 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H605ADRB card


0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is powered on. RUN


The D-type connector (68-pin, male) on the front panel provides the 32-channel POTS port to the voice card.


Figure 3–44 shows the layout of the H605ADRB card.



3-70

H605ADRB

S1

Figure 3–44 Layout of the H605ADRB card

Table 3–54 Settings of jumper of the H605ADRB card





Figure 3–45 and Figure 3–46 show the pin assignment between the H605ADRB card and the backplane.



Connect 16 subscriber cables to the 1st–16th pin rows on the upper HEADER. Connect the rest 16 subscriber cables to the 17th–32nd pin rows on the lower

HEADER.



3-71

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7


B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

Figure 3–45 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H605ADRB card



3-72

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS11+POTS11-

POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A24

A16B16

A25A26A27A28A29A30A31

B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31

A17B17A18B18A19B19A20B20A21B21

A22B22A23B23

Figure 3–46 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H605ADRB card

3.17 16-Port Analog Line Card–CB36ASL/CB37ASL

3.17.1 Overview

The CB36ASL/CB37ASL card is the 16-port analog line card. It has the following functions:

BORSCHT. Reversed polarity for all ports. Software adjustment for port impedance, port level, and battery feeding mode

(constant-voltage battery feeding or constant-current battery feeding).

The differences between the CB37ASL and the CB36ASL cards are as follows:

The CB36ASL can provide the 16/12KC charging signal. The CB37ASL includes the CB37ASL0 and the CB37ASL1. Compared with the

CB37ASL0, the CB37ASL1 supports the remote power supply.



3-73

Note:

The meanings of BORSCHT are as follows: B: Battery O: Overvoltage and overcurrent protection R: Ringing S: Supervision C: Codec H: Hybrid T: Test

3.17.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the CB36ASL/CB37ASL card, as described in Table 3–55.

Table 3–55 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB36ASL/CB37ASL card


0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card is starting.


ON The power supply BAT is powered off.


Figure 3–47 and Figure 3–48 show the pin assignment between the CC36ASL/CB37ASL card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.


Connect the first eight channels of POTS signals to the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER.

Connect the last eight channels of POTS signals to the 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER.



3-74

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R


POT S0-POT S1-POT S2-POT S3-POT S4-POT S5-POT S6-POT S7-

Figure 3–47 Pin assignment between the CC36ASL/CB37ASL card and the backplane (upper HEADER)



3-75

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R



Figure 3–48 Pin assignment between the CC36ASL/CB37ASL card and the backplane (lower HEADER)

3.18 16-Port Analog Line Card–CB38ASL

3.18.1 Overview

The CB38ASL card is the 16-port analog line card, it has the following functions:

BORSCHT. Port backup. Reversed polarity and 16/12KC charging signal. Software adjustment for port impedance, port level, and battery feeding mode

(constant-voltage battery feeding or constant-current battery feeding). Line cards compliant with different countries can be developed by modifying the

software.



3-76

Note:

The meanings of BORSCHT are as follows: B: Battery O: Overvoltage and overcurrent protection R: Ringing S: Supervision C: Codec H: Hybrid T: Test

3.18.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED in the front panel of the CB38ASL card, as described in Table 3–56.

Table 3–56 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB38ASL card




ON The power supply VBAT is powered off.


Figure 3–49 and Figure 3–50 show the pin assignment between the CB38ASL card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.



Connect the first eight channels of POTS signals to the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER.

Connect the last eight POTS signals to the 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER.



3-77

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R



Figure 3–49 Pin assignment between the CB38ASL card and the backplane(upper HEADER)



3-78

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R



Figure 3–50 Pin assignment between the CB38ASL card and the backplane (lower HEADER)

3.19 32-Port Analog Line Card–CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL

3.19.1 Overview

The CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card is the 32-port analog line card with the BORSCHT function. The silk screen on the front panel is A32.

The differences among the CC0HASL, CC0NASL, and CC0RASL cards are as follows.

Only ports 16 and 17 of the CC0HASL card provide the polarity reversal function. All ports of the CC0NASL and CC0RASL cards provide the polarity reversal

function. The feed current of the CCONASL card and that of the CC0RASL card are

20 mA and 30 mA respectively.

The following takes the CC0HASL as example to describe the 32-port analog line card.



3-79

Note:

BORSCHT is described as follows. B: Battery O: Overvoltage and overcurrent protection R: Ringing S: Supervision C: Codec H: Hybrid T: Test

3.19.2 Front Panel

Table 3–57 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the

CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card.

Table 3–57 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card

Name Meaning Status Description


Fast blinking or OFF The card is abnormal. RUN Running status LED

ON The security unit of the card blows.

ON At least one port of the card is in busy state.

BSY Busy LED OFF All ports of the card are in

idle state.


Figure 3–51 shows the pin assignment between the CC0HASL card and the backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)



3-80


123456789

10111213141516171819202122

2324252627282930

3132

1234567891011121314

1516171819202122232425262728

29303132

3334353637383940414243444546

4748495051525354

555657585960

61626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

21222324252627282930

3132

123456789

1011121314151617181920

21222324252627282930

3132

6566676869707172737475767778

7980818283848586

878889909192

93949596




Figure 3–51 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card



3-81


123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920

212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596




Figure 3–52 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL card

Note:

Numbers in the figure refer to subscriber serial numbers.

3.20 16-Port Analog Line Card–CC0KASL/CC0MASL

3.20.1 Overview

The CC0KASL/CC0MASL card is the 16-port analog line card. It has the following functions:

BORSCHT. Selectable A/µ law coding without changing hardware. Port impedance, port level can be adjusted by software.



3-82

The difference between the CC0MASL and the CC0KASL are as follows.

All ports of the CC0MASL card provide the polarity reversal function. Only ports 8 and 9 of the CC0KASL card provide the polarity reversal function.

Note:

The CC0KASL has two finished cards: CC0KASL0 and CC0KASL1. Compared with the CC0KASL0, the CC0KASL1 supports more impedance and ringing modes, and the commands of setting the ringing and stopping howler tone. CCOKASL in the following represents the two finished cards. The meanings of BORSCHT are as follows:

B: Battery O: Overvoltage and overcurrent protection R: Ringing S: Supervision C: Codec H: Hybrid T: Test

3.20.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card, as described in Table 3–58.

Table 3–58 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card




ON The power supply BAT is powered off.


Figure 3–47 and Figure 3–54 show the pin assignment between the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.





3-83

Connect the first eight subscriber cables to the 1st and 8th rows of pins on the upper HEADER.

Connect the last eight subscriber cables to the 25th and 32nd rows of pins on the lower HEADER.

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R



Figure 3–53 Pin assignment between the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card and the backplane (upper HEADER)



3-84

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R



Figure 3–54 Pin assignment between the CC0KASL/CC0MASL card and the backplane (lower HEADER)

3.21 6-Port 2/4-Wire E&M Port Card–H601ATIA

3.21.1 Overview

The H601ATIA card provides six 2/4-wire E&M ports. It is slot-compatible with line cards.

The H601ATIA card connects to the opposite H601ATIA card through the SPC. See below for details.

1) The H601ATIA card detects the E and M signaling. 2) If the signaling is changed, the occupied channel will send it to the opposite end

through special coding. 3) The opposite H601ATIA card monitors the received signaling codes. 4) The opposite H601ATIA card controls the corresponding port to send out relative

signals.

In this way, the H601ATIA card achieves the transparent transmission of the signaling and services.

Each port of the H601ATIA card can support the 2/4-wire voice frequency line and 1E1M signaling line, instead of 2E2M signaling line. When E and M lines are not used,



3-85

the 2/4 voice frequency line can be used independently to carry voice frequency signals.

The voice frequency port level of the H601ATIA card can be adjusted through software. The settings of 2/4-wire voice frequency line can be done through software configuration and hardware jumper.

3.21.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–55 shows the front panel of the H601ATIA card.

Running status LED

Channel 1 busy LED

EM4 trunk port LED

AT2 trunk port LED

EM2 trunk port LED

RUN

CH1

ATIA

EM2

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

EM4

AT2

Channel 2 busy LEDChannel 3 busy LEDChannel 4 busy LEDChannel 5 busy LEDChannel 6 busy LED

Figure 3–55 Front panel of the H601ATIA card

Table 3–59 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601ATIA card.

Table 3–59 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601ATIA card





3-86


0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card fails to communicate with the host.

Blinking The channel is being connected.

CH1–6 ON

The channel is already connected and can be used for conversation, or is in conversation.

EM2 and EM4 are ON simultaneously

The host hasn't sent the configuration command to the H601ATIA card. EM2

Only EM2 is ON among EM2, EM4 and AT2

The card is configured as an EM2 trunk port.

EM4 Reserved.

AT2 Reserved.


Figure 3–56 shows the layout of H601ATIA card.

ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

SW14SW13SW12

SW8SW7SW6

1

2

3

4

ON

SW1

1 2

ON

SW2

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

1 2 3 4

ON

SW9SW10SW11

ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW3SW4SW5

JP12

JP13 JP11

JP10

JP14

JP9

JP8

JP7

JP6

JP5

SS1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8JP17

JP16

JP15

JP18

JP19

JP4

H601ATIA

Figure 3–56 Layout of the H601ATIA card

Table 3–60 describes the settings of DIP switch SW1 of the H601ATIA card.



3-87

Table 3–60 Settings of DIP switch SW1

Switch ON OFF

SW1-1 The WATCHDOG circuit does not work.

WATCHDOG circuit works. It is also the factory setting.

SW1-2 Voice frequency lines A and B are for input.

Voice frequency lines A, B, C and D are for input. It is also the factory setting.

Table 3–61 describes the settings of DIP switch SW2 of the H601ATIA card.

Table 3–61 Settings of DIP switch SW2

DIP switch ON OFF

SW2 SPROM loads FPGA. CPU loads FPGA.

Note: You are required to set DIP switch SW2 of the ATI card in OFF state.

Table 3–62 describes the settings of DIP switches SW3–SW14 of the H601ATIA card.

Table 3–62 Settings of DIP switches SW3–SW14

DIP switch Function Meaning Factory setting

SW3–SW8 Select the trunk mode of the 1st–6th ports.

Bits 2 and 5 are set to ON, and others are OFF: The corresponding ports are used for EM2.

NA

SW9–SW14

Select the voice frequency input mode of the 1st–6th channel ports.

Bits 1 and 4 are set to ON and Bits 2 and 3 are OFF: Voice frequency lines A and B are for input. Bit 1 and Bit 4 are set to OFF, and Bit 2 and Bit 3 are ON: Voice frequency lines A, B, C and D are for input.

Bits 1 and 4 are set to OFF. Bits 2 and 3 are set to ON.

DIP switch SS1 is used to reset the H601ATIA card manually.


Figure 3–57 and Figure 3–58 show the pin assignment between the H601ATIA card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.



3-88

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

G1AG1BG1CG1DG1E1G1E2G1M1G1M2

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596



Figure 3–57 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ATIA card



3-89

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R


123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596



Figure 3–58 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ATIA card

Table 3–63 lists the meanings of the signal cables.

Table 3–63 Meanings of signal cables of the H60ATIA card

Signal cable Meaning

G1A–G6A the 1st–6th channels of Cable A

G1B–G6B the 1st–6th channels of Cable B

G1C–G6C the 1st–6th channels of Cable C

G1D–G6D the 1st–6th channels of Cable D

G1E1–G6E1 the 1st–6th channels of E1 cable

G1E2–G6E2 the 1st–6th channels of E2 cable

G1M1–G6M1 the 1st–6th channels of M1 cable

G1M2–G6M2 the 1st–6th channels of M2 cable

Note:

The ATIA dedicated cable shall be configured for the H601ATIA card.



3-90

3.22 16-Port Direct Dial-in Subscriber Port Card–H301CDI/CC01CDI

3.22.1 Overview

The H301CDI/CC01CDI card is the 16-port direct dial-in subscriber port card, which realizes transparent transmission for the analog subscriber port. The H301CDI/CC01CDI card is compatible with the line card slot, and uses the same cable as the 16- port ASL card.

3.22.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–59 shows the front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card.

Running status LED

Channel busy LEDs

RUN

CH0

CH1CH2

CH3CH4

CH5

CH6CH7

CH8

CH9

CH10

CH11

CH12

CH13CH14

CH15

CD I / a

Figure 3–59 Front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card

Table 3–64 describes the details of the front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card.



3-91

Table 3–64 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H301CDI/CC01CDI card



0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card fails to communicate with the host. RUN

0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF for 3s The card self-test fails.

CH0–15 ON The corresponding channel is occupied.

3.22.3 Pin Assignment between Card and Backplane

Figure 3–60 and Figure 3–61 show the pin assignment between the H301CDI/CC01CDI card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.



Connect the first eight channels of direct dial-in signals to the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER.

Connect the last eight channels of direct dial-in signals to the 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER.



3-92

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

R 0R 1R 2R 3R 4R 5R 6R 7

T 0T 1T 2T 3T 4T 5T 6T 7

Figure 3–60 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H301CDI/CC01CDI card

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

R 8R 9R 10R 11R 12R 13R 14R 15

T 8T 9T 10T 11T 12T 13T 14T 15

Figure 3–61 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H301CDI/CC01CDI card



3-93

3.23 16-port POTS and ADSL Combo Line Card–H601CSLB

3.23.1 Overview

The H603CSLB card is the POTS and ADSL combo line card with the built-in splitter.

The H601CSLB card provides 16 ADSL ports and 16 POTS ports. The ADSL ports and the POTS ports are managed by two control units, so the two types of ports will not affect each other either on services or on management. Where, the 16 POTS ports support the reversal polarity function.

3.23.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED in the front panel of the H601CSLB board, as described in Table 3–65.

Table 3–65 Description of front panel of the H601CSLB card



0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is being powered on.

ON The –48V power supply of the POTS access module is abnormal (no feedback or extra low voltage.)

0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for 8s Continuous ON for several

seconds 0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for 8s

…

The POTS service is abnormal. The control unit of POTS access module is reset repeatedly.

RUN

0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for more than 8s

The POTS access module is normal, and the ADSL access module works abnormally.

Note:

The LED on the H601CSLB card mainly indicates the narrowband service status. It can not indicate the broadband service status in the case of narrowband functions failure. Therefore, the broadband service status shall be queried at the maintenance terminals.


Refer to Table 3–66 for the jumper settings of the H601CSLB card.



3-94

Table 3–66 Jumper settings of the H601CSLB card

Jumper Status Meaning Description

S1 Open

For the upgrade loading of board software of the POTS access module

It is open by default. Connect it with the short-circuiter before the software loading, and disconnect it after the loading.

S5 Open

For the upgrade loading of board software of the ADSL access module

It is open by default. Connect it with the short-circuiter before the software loading, and disconnect it after the loading.


Figure 3–62 and Figure 3–63 show the pin assignment between the H601CSLA card and backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.



Connect the first eight channels of POTS and ADSL combo signals to the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER.

Connect the last eight channels of POTS and ADSL combo signals to the 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER.



3-95

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7

Figure 3–62 Pin assignment between the H601CSLB card and the backplane (upper HEADER)



3-96

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15

B 8B 9B10B11B12B13B14B15

Figure 3–63 Pin assignment between the H601CSLB card and the backplane (lower HEADER)

3.24 16-Port POTS and ADSL Combo Line Card–H601CSLI

3.24.1 Overview

The H601CSLI card is the POTS and ADSL combo line card. It supports circuit and loop line test, port backup functions and has the splitter.

The H601CSLI card provides 16 ADSL ports and 16 POTS ports, which are controlled by two control units respectively.

The 16 POTS ports support the full reversal polarity, like the functions of the ASL card.

3.24.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601CSLI card, as described in Table 3–67.

Table 3–67 Description of the front panel of the H601CSLI card






3-97


ON

The –48V power supply of the POTS access module is abnormal (no feedback or extra low voltage).

0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for 8s Continuous ON for several

seconds 0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for 8s

…

Te POTS service is abnormal. The control unit of POTS access module is reset repeatedly.


The POTS service is normal, and the ADSL access module works abnormally.

Note:

The RUN LED on the front panel of the H601CSLI card mainly indicates the narrowband service status, and cannot indicate the broadband service status normally in the case of narrowband service module failure. In this case, you can query the broadband service status through the maintenance terminals.


Table 3–68 shows the settings of jumpers S1 and S5 of the H601CSLI card.

Table 3–68 Jumper settings of the H601CSLI card


S1 Open

For the upgrade loading of card software of the POTS access module

It is open by default. Make it short circuited before software loading, and recover it after the loading.

S5 Open

For the upgrade loading of card software of the ADSL access module

It is open by default. Its usage is the same as jumper S1.

Note:

S1 and S5 settings are as follows:



3-98

CLOSE: short-circuit the jumpers. OPEN: switch off the jumpers.


Figure 3–64 and Figure 3–65 show the pin assignment between the H601CSLI card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.



Connect the first eight channels of POTS and ADSL combo signals to the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER.

Connect the last eight channels of POTS and ADSL combo signals to the 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER.

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7

Figure 3–64 Pin assignment between the H601CSLI card and the backplane (upper HEADER)



3-99

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15

B 8B 9B10B11B12B13B14B15

Figure 3–65 Pin assignment between the H601CSLI card and the backplane (upper HEADER)

3.25 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card–H602CSMB

3.25.1 Overview

The H602CSMB card is the POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ combo line card with the built-in splitter.

The H602CSMB card provides 16 ADSL/ADSL2+ ports and 16 POTS ports. The ADSL ports and the POTS ports are managed by two control units, so the two types of ports will not affect each other either on services or on management. Where, POTS ports 7 and 8 support the reversal polarity function.

The H602CSMB card supports the circuit and loop line test by configuring a test relay card.

3.25.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H602CSMB card, as described in Table 3–69.



3-100

Table 3–69 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H602CSMB card



0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is powered on.

ON The –48 V power supply of the POTS access module is abnormal (no feedback or extra low voltage.)

0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for 8s Continuous ON for several seconds 0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for 8s

…

The POTS service is abnormal. The control unit of POTS access module is reset repeatedly.

RUN


The POTS service is normal, but the ADSL access module works abnormally.

Note:

The RUN LED on the front panel of the H602CSMB card mainly indicates the narrowband service status, and cannot indicate the broadband service status normally in case of narrowband service module failure. In this case, you can query the broadband service status through the maintenance terminals.


Table 3–70 shows the settings of jumpers S1 and S5 of the H602CSMB card.

Table 3–70 Jumper settings of the H602CSMB/H602CSMC card


S1 Open For the upgrade loading of card software of the POTS access module

It is open by default. Short-circuit it before software loading, and recover it after the loading.

S5 Open For the upgrade loading of card software of the ADSL access module

It is open by default. Short-circuit it before software loading, and recover it after the loading.


Figure 3–66 and Figure 3–67 show the pin assignment between the H602CSMB card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.



3-101



Connect the first eight channels of POTS and ADSL2+ combo signals to the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER.

Connect the last eight channels of POTS and ADSL2+ combo signals to the 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER.

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7

Figure 3–66 Pin assignment between the H602CSMB and the backplane (upper HEADER)



3-102

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15

B 8B 9B10B11B12B13B14B15

Figure 3–67 Pin assignment between the H602CSMB and the backplane (lower HEADER)

3.26 16-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card–H603CSMB/H603CSMC

3.26.1 Overview

The H603CSMB/H603CSMC card is the 16-port POTS and 16-port ADSL/ADSL2+ combo line card.

ADSL/ADSL2+ services are sent to the broadband control card through the backplane, and then sent to the ATM/IP network by the control card. POTS services are sent to the narrowband control card through the HW bus, and then sent to the LE through the E1 port.

The H603CSMB/H603CSMC card has the following features:

Provides the built-in splitter. Supports the circuit and loop line test. Works in the hot backup mode.

3.26.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card.

Table 3–71 describes the LED on the front panel of the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card.



3-103

Table 3–71 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card




ON –48 V power supply of the POTS access unit is abnormal (no feed or undervoltage).

0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for 8s ON for 2s

0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF for 8s …

POTS service is abnormal. The main control unit of the POTS access unit keeps resetting.

RUN: running status LED


POTS service is normal, but ADSL access unit is abnormal.


Figure 3–68 shows the jumpers of the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card.

H603CSMC

S2

S1

Figure 3–68 Jumpers of the H603CSMC card

Table 3–72 describes the settings of jumpers of the H603CSMC card.



3-104

Table 3–72 Settings of jumpers of the H603CSMC card


CLOSE The card is enabled to load the software of the ADSL access module.

S1

OPEN The card is disabled from loading the software of the ADSL access module. It is also the factory setting.

CLOSE The card can be reset. S2

OPEN The card cannot be reset. It is also the factory setting.

Note:

S1 and S2 settings are as follows: CLOSE: short-circuit the jumpers. OPEN: switch off the jumpers.


Figure 3–69 and Figure 3–70 show the pin assignment between the H603CSMC card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.







3-105

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

123456789

10111213141516171819202122

2324252627282930

3132

1234567891011121314

1516171819202122232425262728

29303132

3334353637383940414243444546

4748495051525354

555657585960

61626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

21222324252627282930

3132

123456789

1011121314151617181920

21222324252627282930

3132

6566676869707172737475767778

7980818283848586

878889909192

93949596

B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

Figure 3–69 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603CSMB/H603CSMC card



3-106

A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15

123456789

10111213141516171819202122

2324252627282930

3132

1234567891011121314

1516171819202122232425262728

29303132

3334353637383940414243444546

4748495051525354

555657585960

61626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

21222324252627282930

3132

123456789

1011121314151617181920

21222324252627282930

3132

6566676869707172737475767778

7980818283848586

878889909192

93949596

B8B9B10B11B12B13B14B15

Figure 3–70 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603CSMB/H603CMSC card

3.27 32-Port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ Combo Line Card–H603CSRB

3.27.1 Overview

The H603CSRB card is the 32-port POTS and 16-port ADSL/ADSL2+ combo line card. It communicates with the broadband control card through the LVDS serial interface, and the control card provides upstream broadband service ports for ATM or IP services.

3.27.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H603CSRB card, as described in Table 3–71.



3-107

Table 3–73 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H603CSRB card


1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card is performing self-test.

2s ON and 2s OFF repeatedly The card is normal. RUN

ON The card is abnormal.


Figure 3–68 shows the jumpers of the H603CSRB card.

H603CSRB

S1

S2

Figure 3–71 Layout of the H603CSRB card

Table 3–74 describes settings of jumpers S1 and S2 of the H603CSRB card.

Table 3–74 Settings of jumpers S1 and S2 of the H603CSRB card


CLOSE The cards works in narrowband loading mode. S1

OPEN The card runs normally. It is also the factory setting.

CLOSE The card works in broadband loading mode. S2

OPEN The card runs normally. It is also the factory setting.



3-108

Note:

Settings of jumpers S1 and S2: CLOSE: The jumpers are short-circuited. OPEN: The jumpers disconnect.


Figure 3–69 and Figure 3–70 show the pin assignment between the H603CSRB card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.

The numbers in Figure 3–69 and Figure 3–70 are port serial numbers.

Connect the subscriber cables as follows:



POT S2+

POT S4+POT S5+POT S6+

123456789

1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 02 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 93 03 13 2

123456789

1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 02 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 8

2 93 0

3 13 2

3 33 43 53 6

3 73 8

3 94 04 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 95 05 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 96 06 16 26 36 4

1234567891 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 0

2 12 2

2 32 42 52 62 72 82 93 03 13 2

123456789

1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 0

2 12 2

2 32 42 52 62 72 82 93 03 13 2

6 56 66 76 8

6 97 0

7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 98 08 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 99 09 19 29 39 49 59 6

POT S0-POT S1-POT S2-

POT S4-POT S5-POT S6-POT S7-

POT S8-POT S9+POT S9-POT S10+POT S10-POT S11+POT S11-

POT S12+POT S12-

POT S13-POT S14+POT S14-POT S15+POT S15-

T 3- R

R 4- RT 7- R

R 8- RT 4- RT 8- R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

A8B 8A9B 9A10B10A11B11A12B12A13B13A14B14A15B15

B 0B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7

Figure 3–72 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H603CSRB card



3-109

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS11+POTS11-

POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A24

A16B16

A25A26A27A28A29A30A31

B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31

A17B17A18B18A19B19A20B20A21B21

A22B22A23B23

Figure 3–73 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H603CSRB card

3.28 16-Port Circuit Emulation E1 Port Card–H601DEHA

3.28.1 Overview

The H601DEHA card is the 16-port circuit emulation E1 port card.

The H601DEHA card provides independent 16 E1 ports, and supports the unstructured data transfer (UDT) CES. Each port supports system clock, line clock and Time Stamp clock. The clock of each port is independent of others.

The H601DEHA card is installed in the line card slot in the UA5000 frame. It is recommended that up to two DEHA cards be installed in one UA5000 frame.

The H601DEHA card provides E1 private line access service and TDM E1 access service.

I. E1 private line access

The H601DEHA card supports private line access service through E1 channels. The UA5000 adapts the E1 signals into ATM cells, and then the MD5500 restores the ATM cells back to E1 signals and sends them to the DDN node. The private line access service here is like the extension of DDN private line service.

Another application of the private line access service is to connect two E1 nodes at one or two UA5000s directly, without passing through the upper-layer equipment. This



3-110

application can be looked as a feature of the transmission system, where two tributary interfaces are connected directly.

II. TDM E1 access

The H601DEHA card accesses TDM services through E1 channels. The UA5000 adapts the E1 signals into ATM cells. Then, the MD5500 restores the ATM cells back into E1 signals and sends them to the LE. The TDM E1 access can be looked as the trunk access of voice services.

3.28.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601DEHA card, as described in Table 3–75.

Table 3–75 Description of the LED ON the front panel of the H601DEHA card


0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card works normally. RUN


3.28.3 DIP Switches

Figure 3–74 shows the layout of the H601DEHA card.

H601DEHA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ONS3

S81 2 3 4

Figure 3–74 Layout of the H601DEHA card



3-111

I. DIP switches S1, S2, S5, and S6

These switches are used to set whether to ground the shielding layer at the Tx or Rx end of the E1 port. Table 3–76 shows their settings and meanings.

Table 3–76 Settings and meanings of DIP switches S1, S2, S5, and S6

DIP switch ON OFF Factory setting

S1 1-4#E1 Grounded Not grounded ON




Remarks: Every DIP switch contains eight bits for controlling four E1 ports. The grounding for the shielding layer of every E1 port is controlled by two bits: the first one is for Tx, and the second one is for Rx.

II. DIP switches S3 and S4

DIP switches S3 and S4 are used to select the matching impedance at the E1 Rx end, as shown in Table 3–77.

Table 3–77 Settings of DIP switches S3 and S4


Control 1#E1 S3-1 75-ohm 120-ohm ON
















3-112







To select the matching impedance, you need to set the DIP switches correctly and make the data configuration consistent at both ends.

III. DIP switch S8

DIP switch S8 is used to indicate the E1 port impedance, as shown in Table 3–78.

Table 3–78 Settings of DIP switch S8


S8-1 75-ohm 120-ohm ON

S8-2-4 Reserved

Caution:

The setting of DIP switch will take effect after you reset the card. The impedances for all the 16 E1 ports on the card must be the same, either

120-ohm or 75-ohm, which shall be consistent with the DIP switch S8-1.


Figure 3–75 and Figure 3–76 show the pin assignment between the H601DEHA card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.



3-113

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

787980818283848586878889

90919293949596

RT1TT1

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

464748495051525354555657

58596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

RT2TT2RT3TT3RT4TT4


PGNDPGND

PGNDPGND

-48V-48V

-48V-48V

GNDGND

GND

GNDGND

GND


Figure 3–75 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601DEHA card

I1BI1A I1C6566676869707172

7475

73

7776

78798081828384858687888990919293949596

RT5TT5

3334353637383940

4243

41

4544

46474849505152535455565758596061626364

12345678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920212223242526272829303132

RT6TT6R67T67RT8TT8

RR5

TR5RR6TR6RR7TR7RR8TR8

BGNDBGND-48V-48V

PGNDPGND


GND

GND

GNDGND

BGNDBGND-48V-48V

PGNDPGND

GND

GND

GNDGND

Figure 3–76 Signal definition of lower HEADER on the H601DEHA card



3-114

In Figure 3–75 and Figure 3–76:

RR1–16: Channels 1–16 of E1 signal correspond to the “ring” of the signal received at the H601DEHA.

RT1–16: Channels 1–16 of E1 signal correspond to the “tip” of the signal received at the H601DEHA.

TR1–16: Channels 1–16 of E1 signal correspond to the “ring” of the signal sent from the H601DEHA.

TT1–16: Channels 1–16 of E1 signal correspond to the “tip” of the signal sent from the H601DEHA.

3.29 8-Port Digital Line Card–CB02DSL/CB03DSL

3.29.1 Overview

The CB02DSL/CB03DSL card is the digital line card that provides eight ISDN BRA (2B+D) ports.

The CB02DSL card can not supply the power remotely while the CB03DSL card can. The digital line card is slot-compatible with the analog line card.

The card provides:

Standard ISDN BRA services TA128 semi-permanent connection mode MTA access mode U-port transparent transmission access mode

The 8 U ports in the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card can be configured to different working modes.

The CB03DSL card can provide the power supply to subscriber terminals. It controls the DC power supply of eight ports through the remote power control circuit. The provision of power supply can be set by ports through configuration at the background. The power supply circuit has the functions of overcurrent detection and automatic protection. The automatic recovery of power supply can be implemented through the software control.

3.29.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–77 shows the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card.



3-115

Running status LED

Serial port communication LED

Port 0 active LED

RUN

DSL

Port 1 active LEDPort 2 active LEDPort 3 active LEDPort 4 active LEDPort 5 active LEDPort 6 active LEDPort 7 active LED

Figure 3–77 Front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card

Table 3–79 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card.

Table 3–79 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card




The card is requesting the configuration information to the control card.

RUN


ON Activated.

OFF Deactivated.

Port 0–7

0.625s ON and 0.625s OFF repeatedly Activating the U port.



3-116


0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly Activating the S/T port.

COM 1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The master and slave nodes communicate for 160 times.


The eight channels of subscriber signals provides by the CB02DSL/CB03DSL card are connected with the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–78. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.

The numbers in Figure 3–78 are the port serial numbers.

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

Figure 3–78 Pin assignment of upper HEADER of the DSL card



3-117

3.30 8-Port Digital Subscriber Line Card–CB05DSL

3.30.1 Overview

The CB05DSL card is the ISDN 2B+D line card that provides eight subscriber ports (Ports U1 to U8). The CB05DSL card resides in the subscriber frame.

The CB05DSL card has the following features:

When the backup function is needed, the CB05DSL card can provide seven active subscriber ports and one standby subscriber port.

It processes the ISDN LAPD (Q.921) protocol for the eight ports. It supports the circuit and loop line test. It is used for the CENTREX console access service. It supports reading the electronic bar code.

3.30.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–79 shows the front panel of the CB05DSL card.



3-118

RUN

DSL

Running status LED

Serial port communication LED

Port 8 active LED

Port 1 active LEDPort 2 active LEDPort 3 active LEDPort 4 active LEDPort 5 active LEDPort 6 active LEDPort 7 active LED

Figure 3–79 Front panel of the CB05DSL card

Table 3–80 describes the details on the front panel of the CB05DSL card.

Table 3–80 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the CB05DSL card



0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card is requesting configuration information from the main control card.

RUN


ON The port is activated.

OFF The port is deactivated.

0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF repeatedly Activating the U port.

Port 1–8

0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly Activating the S/T port.



3-119


ON Serial port communication is normal. COM



The eight channels of subscriber signals provided by the CB05DSL card are connected with the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–80. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.


123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

Figure 3–80 Pin assignment between the CB05DSL card and the backplane (upper HEADER)



3-120

3.31 8-Port Ethernet Access Unit Card–H601EAUA

3.31.1 Overview

The H601EAUA card is the Ethernet access unit card. It has the following functions:

Provides eight FE ports. Provides flow control and L2 switching at wire speed for upstream ATM traffic. Supports up to six groups of port bindings, 8K MAC address self-learning, and 256

802.1Q VLANs. Supports binding the MAC address with the port. Supports broadcast storm suppression.

3.31.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–81 shows the front panel of the H601EAUA card.

Running status LED

Port link LEDPort running LED

EAUA

ACT0LINK0

ACT1LINK1

ACT2LINK2

ACT3LINK3

ACT4LINK4

ACT5LINK5

ACT6LINK6

ACT7LINK7

RUN

Figure 3–81 Front panel of the H601EAUA card



3-121

Table 3–81 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EAUA card.

Table 3–81 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H601EAUA card


0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card works normally. RUN 0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF

repeatedly The system is starting.

OFF The link is not connected. LINK

ON The link is connected.

OFF No data is transmitted. ACT

Blinking There is data being transmitted.


Figure 3–82 and Figure 3–83 show the pin assignment between the H601EAUA card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.

In Figure 3–82 and Figure 3–83, "T" represents transmission, "R" represents reception, and numerals after "XA" represents serial number of the FE port. For example, "FETX0-" indicates "Tx of the first FE port-".



3-122

BA C1

234

5678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920

212223

2425

2627

2829

303132

FERX0+FETX0+

FERX0-FETX0-

1

234

5678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920

212223

2425

2627

2829

303132

1

234

5678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920

212223

2425

2627

2829

303132

FERX1+FETX1+

FERX1-FETX1-

FERX2+FETX2+

FERX2-FETX2-

FERX3+FETX3+

FERX3-FETX3-

Figure 3–82 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601EAUA card



3-123

BA C1

234

5678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920

212223

2425

2627

2829

303132

FERX4+FETX4+

FERX4-FETX4-

1

234

5678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920

212223

2425

2627

2829

303132

1

234

5678

1011

9

1312

14151617181920

212223

2425

2627

2829

303132

FERX5+

FETX5+

FERX5-

FETX5-

FERX6+

FETX6+

FERX6-

FETX6-FERX7+FETX7+

FERX7-FETX7-

Figure 3–83 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601EAUA card

3.32 2-Port High Speed Line Card–H302HSL

3.32.1 Overview

The H302HSL card is the synchronous high-speed line card. It provides two V.35 ports and two E1 ports at the rate of N x 64kbit/s (1 ≤ N ≤ 31).

When internal HW resources are occupied, the maximum available rate of the V.35 port is 25 x 64 kbit/s.

When E1 ports are occupied, the maximum available rate of the V.35 port is 31 x 64 kbit/s.

The E1 port on the card can be connected with the remote data service unit to:

Access the remote N x 64 kbit/s data service, or Serve as the trunk channel to carry N x 64 kbit/s data service.

When the E1 port is used for trunking, the N x 64 kbit/s data will be transmitted through E1 ports, without occupying the HW resources.

The card can lock the phase of different clock sources, including the clock provided by ST-BUS in the subscriber frame or the clock extracted from the E1 port.

The H302HSL card has the digital cross-connection function, with the exchange capability of six HW time slots.



3-124

Note:

The H302HSL works in the data connection equipment (DCE) mode. When the DTE is required, the DCE-DTE conversion connector will convert the DCE to DTE, but the HSL card still works in DCE mode.

3.32.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–84 shows the front panel of the H302HSL card.

RUN

TXD0

Running status LED

RXD1

TXD1

LFA0

LOS0

LFA1

LOS1

RXD0

E1 signal LED

HSL

Receiving data LED for the 1st V.35 port

Frame out-of-sync. LED for the 1st E1 port

LINK

Transmitting data LED for the 1st V.35 portReceiving data LED for the 2nd V.35 portTransmitting data LED for the 2nd V.35 port

Loss of signal LED for the 1st E1 portFrame out-of-sync. LED for the 2nd E1 portLoss of signal LED for the 2nd E1 port

Figure 3–84 Front panel of the H302HSL card

Table 3–82 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H302HSL card.



3-125

Table 3–82 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H302HSL card


0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly Card power-on, self-test. RUN

1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card self-test is passed.

ON V.35 port is receiving data. RXD0-1

OFF V.35 port is not receiving data.

ON V.35 port is sending data. TXD0-1

OFF V.35 port is not sending data.

ON Frame out-of-sync. LFA0-1

OFF Normal.

ON Loss of signal. LOS0-1

OFF Normal.

LINK ON A signal exists over any E1 on the card.


Figure 3–85 shows the layout of the H302HSL card.

H302HSL

S1

1 2 3 4

ON

SW4

1 2 3 4

ON

SW1

1 2 3 4

ON

SW5

1 2 3 4

ON

SW2

1 2 3 4

ON

SW3

1 2 3JP1JP2

JP3

Figure 3–85 Layout of the H302HSL card



3-126

Table 3–83 describes the settings of DIP switches and jumpers on the H302HSL card.

Table 3–83 Settings of DIP switches and jumpers on the H302HSL card

DIP switch/ Jumper

Function Meaning Default setting

SW4

Selecting the working mode of the first V.35 port.

SW4-1 and SW4-2 are ON, and SW4-3 and SW4-4 are OFF: the first V.35 port works in the DCE mode.

SW4-1 and SW4-2 are ON. SW4-3 and SW4-4 are OFF.

SW5

Selecting the working mode of the second V.35 port.

SW5-1 and SW5-2 are ON, and SW5-3 and SW5-4 are OFF: the second V.35 port works in the DCE mode.

SW5-1 and SW5-2 are ON. SW5-3 and SW5-4 are OFF.

SW1, SW3

Setting the impedance of the first E1 port

SW1-1, SW1-2 and SW3-1 are ON: the first E1 port uses the 75-ohm matching impedance. SW1-1, SW1-2 and SW1-3 are OFF: the second E1 port uses the 120-ohm matching impedance. SW1-3 is ON: Receiving ring connects to PGND. SW1-4 is ON: Sending ring connects to PGND.

SW1-1 and SW1-2 are ON. SW1-3 and SW1-4 are OFF. SW3-1 is ON.

SW2, SW3

Setting the impedance of the second E1 port

SW2-1, SW2-2 and SW3-2 are ON: the second E1 port uses the 75-ohm matching impedance. SW2-1 and SW2-2 and SW3-2 are OFF: the second E1 port uses the 120-ohm matching impedance. SW2-3 is ON: Receiving ring connects to PGND. SW2-4 is ON: Sending ring connects to PGND.

SW2-1, SW2-2 and SW3-2 are ON. SW2-3 and SW2-4 are OFF.

JP1–JP3 Determining the logic loading mode

JP1 short connects JP2: Load through PROM. JP2 short connects JP3: Load through CPU.

JP2 and JP3 are short circuited.


The pin assignment between card and backplane is as follows:



3-127

The 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER are for the first V.35 port and the first E1 port. The E1 port corresponds to the 7th and 8th pin rows.

The 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER are for the second V.35 port and the second E1 port. The E1 port corresponds to the 31st and 32nd rows of pins.

3.33 2-Port High Speed Line Card–H303HSL

3.33.1 Overview

The H303HSL card is the synchronous high-speed line card. Compatible with the high layer protocol of H302HSL, H303HSL can be applied directly in the environment for H302HSL.

The H303HSL card provides two E1 ports and two SHDSL ports. After the modem conversion, the two SHDSL ports can function as two V.35 ports (N x 64 kbit/s, 3 ≤ N ≤ 31) or two E1 (2048 kbit/s) ports.

The H303ASL card has the following two functions.

I. User service data transmission through SPC

1) Inter-card SPC

After the inter-card SPC is established, the user data borne by the SHDSL port can be transmitted to RSP or PVU8/PVU4 frame over HW, and then transmitted over E1 channels. In this case, the maximum available transmission rate at the SHDSL port is 26 x 64 kbit/s (for the RSP frame) or 28 x 64kbit/s (for the PVU8/PVU4 frame).

2) Intra-card SPC

After the intra-card SPC (between the SHDSL port and E1 port of the card) is established, the user data borne by the SHDSL port can be transmitted directly over E1 port of the card. In this case, the maximum available rate at the SHDSL port is 31 x 64 kbit/s.

II. Clock locking

The H303HSL card can lock clock signals from E1 port or from the HW of the backplane. Therefore, the H303HSL card can work in the environment where the PSTN clock and the DDN clock are not synchronized with each other.

For the E1 access, the H303HSL card shall lock the E1 clock signals. For the HW access, the H303HSL card shall lock the HW clock signals.

Moreover, the MD5500 system clock shall be synchronized to the DDN clock.

3.33.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–86 shows the front panel of the H303HSL card.



3-128

Running status LED

The 1st SHDSL port LED

Reset button

Debug serial port

RUN

WAN1

CO

M

WAN2

E1-1

E1-2

RESET

HSL/T

The 2nd SHDSL port LED

The 1st E1 port status LEDThe 2nd E1 port status LED

Figure 3–86 Front panel of the H303HSL card

Table 3–84 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H303HSL card.

Table 3–84 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H303HSL card



The card is powered on and is performing the self-test.

RUN

1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The self-test is passed.

0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The SHDSL port is in the training status.

ON The SHDSL port is in the normal operation.

WAN1/ WAN2

OFF The SHDSL port is deactivated.



3-129


ON The E1 port is in the normal operation.

OFF The E1 port has LOS or service is interrupted.

E1-1/ E1-2

0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The LFA alarm occurs.

Note: All LEDs are OFF except the WAN1 when the software is loaded or the card software is to

run.

Table 3–85 describes the button and the port on the front panel of the H303HSL card.

Table 3–85 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H303HSL card


RESET The button is used to reset the card manually.

COM RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is 9600 bit/s.


Figure 3–87 shows the layout of the H303HSL card.

H303HSL

1 2

3 4 ON

S7

1 2

3 4 ON

1 2

3 4 ON

S3

S4

Figure 3–87 Layout of the H303HSL card



3-130

Table 3–86 Settings of DIP switches on the H303HSL card

DIP switch Function Meaning Default setting

S3

Impedance setting switch for first E1 port

Bits 1–4 ON: The first E1 port adopts the 75-ohm matching impedance. Bits 1–4 OFF: The first E1 port adopts the 120-ohm matching impedance.

Bits 1–4: ON

S4

Impedance setting switch for second E1 port

Bits 1–4 ON: The second E1 port adopts the 75-ohm matching impedance. Bits 1–4 OFF: The second E1 port adopts the 120-ohm matching impedance.

Bits 1–4: ON

S7 SHDSL port working mode

Bit 1 ON: The SHDSL port is set to the E1 working mode. Bit 1 OFF: The SHDSL port is set to the V.35 working mode. Bits 2–4: reserved.

Bits 1–4: ON

Note:

The activation distance varies with the working mode of the SHDSL port. When the port works in E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km. When the port works in V.35 mode, the higher the transmission rate is, the shorter

the activation distance is. When N is 3, the maximum activation distance is 6 km. When N is 32, the maximum transmission distance is 3 km. The line quality shall also be taken into account.


The two channels of E1 signals provided by the H303HSL card are connected with the 1st–4th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–88.

The two channels of SHDSL signals provided by the H303HSL card are connected with the 31st–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–89.

The characters in Figure 3–88 and Figure 3–89 are described as follows:

The first letters R and T indicate receiving and transmitting respectively. The second letters R and T indicate "ring" and "tip" respectively. The numeral indicates the E1 serial number. Letters A and B indicate lines A and B of the SHDSL subscriber cables

respectively.



3-131

The numbers are the serial numbers of the subscriber cable.

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

333435363738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

10111213141516171819202122

23242526272829303132

12345678910111213141516171819202122

23242526272829303132

656667686970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

TT0RT0TT1RT1

TR0RR0TR1RR1

Figure 3–88 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H303HSL card



3-132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

333435363738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

10111213141516171819202122

23242526272829303132

12345678910111213141516171819202122

23242526272829303132

656667686970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-RLINEA1LINEA0

LINEB1LINEB0

Figure 3–89 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H303HSL card

3.34 4-Port SHDSL and 4-Port E1 Card–H521SDL

3.34.1 Overview

The H601SDLB card is the SHDSL and E1 line card. The H521SDL card provides the SHDSL service access in the TDM mode. Each H521SDL card provides four E1 ports and four SHDSL ports.

After converted by a modem, the four SHDSL ports can work as V35 ports (N x 64 kbit/s, 1 ≤ N ≤ 31) or E1 ports (2048 kbit/s).

According to the configuration, the H521SDL card can track the clock of different ports, including HW port, trunk port and SHDSL port at subscriber side. The SHDSL ports of the H521SDL card may be configured flexibly for various applications. The SHDSL port card can report the port status.



3-133

3.34.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–90 shows the front panel of the H521SDL card.

RUN

CO

M

SDL

WAN1

WAN2WAN3WAN4

E1-1E1-2E1-3E1-4

RST Reset button

Debug serial port

Running status LEDThe 1st SHDSL port LEDThe 2nd SHDSL port LED

The 1st E1 port status LEDThe 2nd E1 port status LED

The 3rd SHDSL port LEDThe 4th SHDSL port LED

The 3rd E1 port status LEDThe 4th E1 port status LED

Figure 3–90 Front panel of the H521SDL card

Table 3–87 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H521SDL card.

Table 3–87 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H521SDL card



The card is powered on and is performing the self-test.

0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card has not registered. RUN

1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card runs normally

WAN1– WAN4 0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The SHDSL port is in the training

status.



3-134


ON The SHDSL port is in the normal operation.


ON The E1 port is in the normal operation.

OFF The E1 port has LOS or service is interrupted.

E1-1– E1-4

0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The LFA alarm occurs.

Note: All LEDs are off except the WAN1 when the software is loaded or the card software is to

run.

Table 3–88 describes the button and the port on the front panel of the H521SDL card.

Table 3–88 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H521SDL card



COM RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is 9600 bit/s.


Figure 3–91 shows the layout of the H521SDL card.



3-135

H521SDL

1 2

3 4 ON

1 2

3 4 ON

1 2

3 4 ON

1 2

3 4 ON

S3

S4

S5

S6

1 2

3 4 ON

S7

Figure 3–91 Layout of the H521SDL card

Table 3–89 Settings of DIP switches of the H521SDL card

DIP switch Function Meaning Default

setting

S3 Impedance setting switch for first E1 port

Bits 1–4 ON: 75-ohm matching impedance. Bits 1–4 OFF: 120-ohm matching impedance.

ON

S4 Impedance setting switch for second E1 port


ON

S5 Impedance setting switch for third E1 port


ON

S6 Impedance setting switch for fourth E1 port


ON

S7 SHDSL port working mode

Bit 1 ON: E1 mode. Bit 1 OFF: V.35 working mode. Bit 2 ON: Master mode. Bit 2 OFF: Slave mode. Bits 3–4: reserved.

ON



3-136

Note:

After the working mode of the SHDSL port is set through the software, the working mode selection of the DIP switch S7-1 will be disabled. When the H521SDL works in the slave mode, only ports 0 and 2 are available, and ports 1 and 3 are unavailable. The activation distance varies with the working mode of the SHDSL port:

In the E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km. In the V.35 mode, the activation distance will be shorter if the port rate is higher.

When N = 3, the maximum activation distance is 6 km; when N=32, it is 3 km. Line quality shall be considered in the actual application, shorten the distance as much as possible when you configure the terminal.


The four channels of E1 signals provided by the H521SDL card are connected with the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–92.

The four channels of SHDSL signals provided by the H521SDL card are connected with the 29th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–93.

Note:

Two AMP connectors of the H521SDL are bundled together. One cable can be connected to two H521SDL cards. Cable color and labels of one AMP connector are different from those of the other AMP connector.

In Figure 3–92 and Figure 3–93, the characters are described as follows:

The first letters R and T indicate receiving and transmitting respectively. The second letters R and T indicate "ring" and "tip" respectively. The numeral indicates the E1 serial number. Letters A and B indicate lines A and B of the SHDSL subscriber cables

respectively. The numbers are the serial numbers of the subscriber cable.



3-137

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

TT1RT1TT2RT2TT3

TT0RT0

RT3

TR1RR1TR2RR2TR3

TR0RR0

RR3

Figure 3–92 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H521SDL card



3-138

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

LINEA0LINEA1LINEA2LINEA3

LINEB0LINEB1LINEB2LINEB3

Figure 3–93 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H521SDL card

3.35 16-Port SHDSL Line Card–H601SDLB

3.35.1 Overview

The H601SDLB card is the 16-port SHDSL line card, which provides the SHDSL access services in the ATM mode.

After converted by a modem, the SHDSL port can work as a Fast Ethernet (FE) port.

The H601SDLB card has the following features:

It supports the circuit and loop line test. It supports the port backup function. It transmits the upstream services through the broadband control card.

3.35.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601SDLB card, as described in Table 3–90.



3-139

Table 3–90 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601SDLB card


0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is under self-test.




Figure 3–94 and Figure 3–95 show the pin assignment between the H601SDLB card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.



Connect the first eight subscriber signals to the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER.

Connect the last eight subscriber signals to the 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER.

LINEA0LINEA1LINEA2LINEA3LINEA4LINEA5LINEA6LINEA7

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

LINEB0LINEB1LINEB2LINEB3LINEB4LINEB5LINEB6LINEB7

Figure 3–94 Pin assignment between the H601SDLB card and the backplane (upper HEADER)



3-140


123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596


Figure 3–95 Pin assignment between the H601SDLB card and the backplane (lower HEADER)

3.36 8-Port SHDSL Line Card–H601SDLT

3.36.1 Overview

The H601SDLT card is the 16-port SHDSL line card, which provides the SHDSL access services in the Time Division Multiplex (TDM) mode.

After converted by a modem, the SHDSL port can work as a V.35 (N x 64kbit/s, 1 ≤ N ≤ 31) or E1 (2048 kbit/s port.

Note:

The activation distance varies with the working mode of the SHDSL port. When the port works in E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km. When the port works in V.35 mode, the higher the transmission rate is, the shorter

the activation distance is. When N = 3, the maximum activation distance is 6 km. When N is 32, the maximum transmission distance is 3 km. The line quality shall also be taken into account. The H601SDLT card and the RSUG shall work in the consistent mode.



3-141

The H601SDLT card has the following features:

It can work in the master mode only. It synchronizes to different clocks according to the data configuration, including the

HW port clock and the local card clock. Each SHDSL port can work in independent application mode (E1 or V.35). It supports reporting each line port status.

The H601SDLT card resides in the line card slot of the UA5000 high-density frame, working with the narrowband control card (PVU8, PVU4, and PVM).

3.36.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–96 shows the front panel of the H601SDLT card

Running status LED

SHDSL LEDs

Reset button

Debug serial port

RUN

WAN1

SDLT

RST

COM

WAN2

WAN3

WAN4

WAN5

WAN6

WAN7

WAN8

Figure 3–96 Front panel of the H601SDLT card

Table 3–91 describes the front panel of the H601SDLT card.



3-142

Table 3–91 Description of the front panel of the H601SDLT card



The card is powered on and performing self-test.

0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card is registering. RUN


0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The SHDSL port is in training state.

ON The SHDSL port is normal. WAN1–WAN8


RESET NA The button used to reset the card manually.

COM NA RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is 9,600 bit/s.

Note: All LEDs are off except WAN1 when the software is being loaded or is ready to run.

Table 3–92 describes the button and the port on the front panel of the H601SDLT card.

Table 3–92 Description of the button and the port on the front panel of the H601SDLT card


RESET The button used to reset the card manually.

COM RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is 9,600 bit/s.


The eight channels of SHDSL signals provided by the H601SDLT card are connected with the 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–97. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane




3-143


123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596


Figure 3–97 Pin assignment of the H601SDLT card on the lower HEADER

3.37 16-Port VDSL Line Card–H601VDLA

3.37.1 Overview

The H601VDLA card is a 16-port VDSL line card. It has the following functions:

Embedded splitter Circuit and loop line test

3.37.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601VDLA card, as described in Table 3–93.

Table 3–93 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601VDLA card






3-144


The 16 channels of VDSL signals provided by the H601VDLA card are connected with the 1st–16th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–98. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.

The 16 channels of POTS signals provided by the H601VDLA card are connected with the 17th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–99. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.


LINE0+LINE1+LINE2+LINE3+LINE4+LINE5+LINE6+LINE7+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

LINE0-LINE1-LINE2-LINE3-LINE4-LINE5-LINE6-LINE7-

LINE8+LINE8-LINE9+LINE9-LINE10+LINE10-LINE11+LINE11-LINE12+LINE12-LINE13+LINE13-LINE14+LINE14-LINE15+LINE15-

Figure 3–98 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601VDLA card



3-145

POT S8+POT S9+POT S10+POT S11+POT S12+POT S13+POT S14+POT S15+

123456789

1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 02 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 93 03 13 2

123456789

1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 02 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 8

2 93 0

3 13 2

3 33 43 53 6

3 73 8

3 94 04 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 95 05 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 96 06 16 26 36 4

1234567891 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 0

2 12 2

2 32 42 52 62 72 82 93 03 13 2

123456789

1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 0

2 12 2

2 32 42 52 62 72 82 93 03 13 2

6 56 66 76 8

6 97 0

7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 98 08 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 99 09 19 29 39 49 59 6


POT S4+POT S4-POT S5+POT S5-POT S6+POT S6-POT S7+POT S7-

POT S0+POT S0-POT S1+POT S1-POT S2+POT S2-POT S3+POT S3-

Figure 3–99 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601VDLA card

3.38 16-Port VDSL Line Card–H601VDLB

3.38.1 Overview

The H601VDLB card is the 16-port VDSL line card.

he H601VDLB card has the following features:

It provides the 16-channel VDSL subscriber port. It has the built-in splitter. It supports the circuit and loop line test. It supports the port backup function.

3.38.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the H601VDLB card, as described in Table 3–94.



3-146

Table 3–94 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601VDLB card



0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF repeatedly The card is starting. RUN



The 16 channels of VDSL signals provided by the H601VDLB card are connected with the 1st–16th pin rows on the upper HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–100. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.

The 16 channels of POTS signals provided by the H601VDLB card are connected with the 17th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER, as shown in Figure 3–101. The figure is seen from the rear of the backplane.


LINE0+LINE1+LINE2+LINE3+LINE4+LINE5+LINE6+LINE7+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

2930

3132

33343536

3738

3940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122

23242526272829303132

65666768

6970

7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

LINE0-LINE1-LINE2-LINE3-LINE4-LINE5-LINE6-LINE7-

LINE8+LINE8-LINE9+LINE9-LINE10+LINE10-LINE11+LINE11-LINE12+LINE12-LINE13+LINE13-LINE14+LINE14-LINE15+LINE15-

Figure 3–100 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601VDLB card



3-147

POT S8+POT S9+POT S10+POT S11+POT S12+POT S13+POT S14+POT S15+

123456789

1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 02 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 93 03 13 2

123456789

1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 02 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 8

2 93 0

3 13 2

3 33 43 53 6

3 73 8

3 94 04 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 95 05 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 96 06 16 26 36 4

1234567891 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 0

2 12 2

2 32 42 52 62 72 82 93 03 13 2

123456789

1 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 92 0

2 12 2

2 32 42 52 62 72 82 93 03 13 2

6 56 66 76 8

6 97 0

7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 98 08 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 99 09 19 29 39 49 59 6




Figure 3–101 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601VDLB card

3.39 16-Port Voice Frequency Port Card–CB02VFB

3.39.1 Overview

The CB02VFB card is the voice frequency port card. It provides sixteen 2-wire or eight 4-wire voice frequency ports. It is slot-compatible with other line cards.

The card implements the conversion between the 2-wire and 4-wire signals and adjusts the gain under the control of software. However, it does not provide feeding, ringing and on-hook detection functions.

3.39.2 Front Panel

There is a RUN LED in the front panel of the CB02VFB card, as described in Table 3–95.



3-148

Table 3–95 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB02VFB card



Fast blinking or OFF The card works abnormally.


Figure 3–102 shows the layout of the CB02VFB card.

ONS091

ONS071

ONS031

ONS151

ONS131

ONS011

ONS111

ONS051

Figure 3–102 Layout of the CB02VFB card

Table 3–96 describes the settings of DIP switches of the CB02VFB card.

Table 3–96 Settings of DIP switches of the CB02VFB card

DIP switch Controlled port

S011-1 1

S011-2 2

S031-1 3

S031-2 4

S051-1 5

S051-2 6



3-149

DIP switch Controlled port

S071-1 7

S071-2 8

S091-1 9

S091-2 10

S111-1 11

S111-2 12

S131-1 13

S131-2 14

S151-1 15

S151-2 16

When these DIP switches are set to ON, 600-ohm impedance will be selected; when they are set to OFF, the 1650-ohm impedance will be selected. Their factory settings are ON.


The CB02VFB provides 16 common voice frequency ports.

The first eight ports are distributed on the 1st–8th rows of pins on the upper HEADER. See Figure 3–103.

The last eight ports are distributed on the 25th–32nd rows of pins on the lower HEADER. See Figure 3–104.



3-150

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

Figure 3–103 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the CB02VFB



3-151

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15

B8B9B10B11B12B13B14B15

Figure 3–104 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the CB02VFB

3.40 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Port Card–CB03VFB

3.40.1 Overview

The CB03VFB card is the railway collinear voice frequency port card. The CB03VFB card is slot compatible with other common line cards, and uses the same cable as the 32-port line card.

The CB03VFB card provides the terminal ports for the railway collinear dispatch system and the common 2/4-wire voice frequency ports. It also realizes the 2/4-wire setting function and the gain adjusting function through the software. However, it provides no feeding, ringing or on-hook detection.

3.40.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the CB03VFB card, as described in Table 3–97.

Table 3–97 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB03VFB card





3-152


Fast blinking or OFF The card works abnormally.

3.40.3 DIP Switches

Figure 3–105 shows the layout of DIP switches of the CB03VFB card.

ONSW0

ONSW1

Figure 3–105 Layout of the CB03VFB card

Table 3–98 describes the settings of DIP switch of the CB03VFB card.

Table 3–98 Settings of DIP switches of the CB03VFB card

DIP switch Function ON OFF (factory setting)

SW0 For backplane setting

Corresponding to the backplanes of HFB, HGB and HIB. When it is set to ON, the upper eight ports support the switchover between new and old systems.

Corresponding to the backplanes of HFB, HGB and HIB. When it is set to OFF, the upper from five to eight ports don’t support the switchover between new and old systems.



3-153

DIP switch Function ON OFF (factory setting)

SW1 For backplane setting

Corresponding to the backplanes of HFB, HGB and HIB. When it is set to ON, the lower eight ports support the switchover between new and old systems.

Corresponding to the backplanes of HFB, HGB and HIB. When it is set to OFF, the lower from five to eight ports don’t support the switchover between new and old systems.

Note:

CB03VFB can only reside in the PV8 or RSP frame, instead of the UA5000 frame.


The CB03VFB card provides 16 channels of subscriber signals, where,

The first eight channels of signals are distributed to pin rows 1–8 of the upper HEADER. They are dedicated in the railway collinear telephone system, and cannot be connected to ordinary voice frequency Modem.

The last eight channels of signals are distributed to pin rows 25–32 of the lower HEADER. They are signals of ordinary voice frequency services.

See Figure 3–103 and Figure 3–107 for details.



3-154

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-RT8-R

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7

B0B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–106 Pin assignment between the CB03VFB card and the backplane (upper HEADER)



3-155

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-

POTS4-


POTS12-


T3-R

R4-RT7-R

R8-RT4-R

A8A9A10A11A12A13A14A15

B8B9B10B11B12B13B14B15

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–107 Pin assignment between the CB03VFB card and the backplane (lower HEADER)

3.41 16-port Message LED Analog Line Card–CB01VMS

3.41.1 Overview

The CB01VMS card is the message LED analog line card that provides 16 analog service ports. It has the following functions:

Provides the feed, overvoltage/overcurrent, ringing, monitoring, and test functions. Provides –140 VDC to light the message LED on the connected terminal. Sends Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) control signals to the terminal without ringing,

so that the terminal can play the message.

Note:

The last two functions require the support of the terminal.



3-156

3.41.2 Front Panel

There is only a RUN LED on the front panel of the CB01VMS card, as described in Table 3–99.

Table 3–99 Description of the LED on the front panel of the CB01VMS card


0.5s ON and .05s OFF repeatedly The card is powered on. RUN



The CB01VMS card provides 16 channels of subscriber signals, where,

The first eight channels of signals are connected with the 1st–8th pin rows on the upper HEADER.

The last eight channels of signals are connected with the 25th–32nd pin rows on the lower HEADER.

See Figure 3–108 and Figure 3–109 for details.



3-157


123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596


Figure 3–108 Pin assignment between the CB01VMS card and the backplane (upper HEADER)



3-158


123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

123456789

1011121314151617181920

212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920

212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596


Figure 3–109 Pin assignment between the CB01VMS card and the backplane (lower HEADER)

3.42 Environment & Power Monitoring Card–H303ESC

3.42.1 Overview

The H303ESC card is the environment and power supply monitoring card. It can control the fans and monitors the following items.

Temperature Humidity (external sensor shall be connected) Access control Infrared intrusion (external sensor shall be connected) Smoke (external sensor shall be connected)

The H303ESC card communicates with the host through serial port.

The H303ESC card can connect with the following parts.

Six external analog sensors Sixteen external digital sensors



3-159

Intelligent power supply equipment through serial ports

3.42.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–110 shows the front panel of the H303ESC card.

Running status lED

RUN OFFON

Beeper switch

Figure 3–110 Front panel of the H303ESC card

Table 3–100 describes the LED on the front panel of the H303ESC card.

Table 3–100 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H303ESC card



0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card works abnormally.

Table 3–101 describes the switch on the front panel of the H303ESC card.

Table 3–101 Description of the switch on the front panel of the H303ESC card


ON Turn on the audio alarm. Beeper switch OFF Turn off the audio alarm.


Figure 3–111 shows the layout of the H303ESC card.



3-160

H303ESC

S11

D1

S5

ON

OFF S6

1

ON OFF

S7

1234

J2 J5S1 S2 S10

S3 S8

1 2 3

2345678

Figure 3–111 Layout of the H303ESC

Table 3–102 describes the settings of jumpers of the H303ESC card.

Table 3–102 Settings of jumpers of the H303ESC card

Jumper Setting Default setting

S1 Bits 1-2 connected: serial port SIO1 is RS-232. Bits 2-3 connected: serial port SIO1 is RS-422.

Bits 2-3 connected

S2 Bits 1-2 connected: serial port SIO2 is RS-232. Bits 2-3 connected: serial port SIO2 is RS-422.

Bits 2-3 connected

S11 Bits 1-2 connected: running LED on the card is valid. Bits 2-3 connected: running LED on the card is invalid.

Bits 1-2 connected

S3, S8, S10

When bits 1 and 2 of S3, S8 and S10 are connected: serial port SIO3 is RS-232. When bits 2 and 3 of S3 are connected, and bits 1 and 2 of S8 and S10 are connected: serial port SIO3 is RS-422. When bits 2 and 3 of S8 and S10 are connected, bits of S3 are connected in any way: serial port SIO3 is RS-485.

All bits 1-2 connected

Table 3–103 and Table 3–104 describe the settings of DIP switches of the H303ESC card.



3-161

Table 3–103 Settings of DIP switch S6 on the H303ESC card

DIP switch Setting Default setting

When bits 1–6 are ON: the external analog sensor is the current-type sensor.

When bits 1–6 are OFF: the external analog sensor is the voltage-type sensor.

S6

Bits 7–8 are reserved.

ON

Table 3–104 Settings of DIP switch S7 on the H303ESC card


S7-1 Used in the access network Used in the exchange ON

S7-2 Reporting through one serial port

Reporting through two serial ports ON

S7-3 No meaning, reserved. ON

S7-4 The reporting baud rate of the serial port is 19200 bit/s.

The reporting baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/s.

OFF

3.43 Environment & Power Monitoring Card–H304ESC

3.43.1 Overview

The H304ESC card is the environment and power supply monitoring card. It can control the fans according to the cabinet temperature and monitors the following items.

Temperature Humidity (external sensor should be connected) Access control Infrared intrusion (external sensor should be connected) Smoke (external sensor should be connected) –48 V power supply

Through serial ports, the H304ESC card connects communicates with the host.

The H304ESC card can connect with the following parts.

Three external analog sensors Twelve external digital sensors Intelligent power supply equipment and environment monitor equipment through

serial ports



3-162

3.43.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–112 shows the front panel of the H304ESC card.

Running status LED

RUN OFFON

Beeper switchReset button

Figure 3–112 Front panel of the H304ESC card

Table 3–105 describes the LED on the front panel of the H304ESC card.

Table 3–105 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H304ESC card



0.5s ON and 0.5s OFF repeatedly The card works abnormally.

Table 3–106 describes the switch and the button on the front panel of the H304ESC card.

Table 3–106 Description of the switch and the button on the front panel of the H304ESC card


ON Turn on the audio alarm. Beeper switch OFF Turn off the audio alarm.



Figure 3–113 shows the layout of the H304ESC card.



3-163

12 3

S4S5S6

S8S7

ONOFF S2

123

4

H304ESC

D6

S9

S1

ON OFFS3

1234

5678

Figure 3–113 Layout of the H304ESC card

Table 3–107 describes the settings of DIP switches of the H304ESC card.

Table 3–107 Settings of DIP switches of the H304ESC card


S3-1 Used in the access network. Used in the exchange. ON

S3-2 Reporting through one serial port.

Reporting through two serial ports. OFF

S3-3 No meaning, reserved NA

S3-4 The reporting baud rate of the serial port is 19200 bit/s.

The reporting baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/s.

OFF

S3-5–S3-8 No meaning, reserved NA

S2-1 JTA1 connects with a current-type sensor.

JTA1 connects with a voltage-type sensor. OFF





S2-4 No meaning, reserved NA

Table 3–108 describes the settings of jumpers of the H304ESC card.



3-164

Table 3–108 Settings of jumpers on the H304ESC card

Communication mode

Silk screen RS232 RS422 RS485 Remarks

AV5/PV8 Default Not supported Not supported

Active reporting serial port

SIO1 S4 1-2 connected S4 2-3 connected Not supported

Power supply monitoring serial port

SIO2 S5 1-2 connected S5 2-3 connected Not supported

Standby reporting serial port

SIO3 S6 1-2 connectedS7 2-3 connectedS8 1-2 connected

S6 1-2 connectedS7 2-3 connectedS8 2-3 connected

Not supported

Transparent transmission

Note:

The factory settings of H304ESC vary with the cabinet.

3.44 Fan Control Card–H601FCB

3.44.1 Overview

The H601FCB card is the fan control card. It controls the fan speed and detects the fan state.

The H601FCB card can report the fan state to ESC card in Boolean value or report the alarm status to the host through RS-485 port for adjusting the fan speed.

The H601FCB card can adjust the fan to rotate within 50%-100% of its rated speed to reduce the fan noise, reduce the incoming dust to the frame, and prolong the service life.

The H601HCB is hot-swappable.

3.44.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–114 shows the front panel of the H601FCB card.



3-165

Fan running status LED

FAN STATUS

Figure 3–114 Front panel of the H601FCB card

Table 3–109 describes the LED on the front panel of the H601FCB card.

Table 3–109 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601FCB card


1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The fan works normally. FAN STATUS 0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF

repeatedly The fan works abnormally.

3.44.3 DIP Switches

Figure 3–115 shows the layout of DIP switches of the CC08TSS card.

SW101

ON

12

34

56

78

H601FCB

Figure 3–115 Layout of the H601FCB card

The DIP switches SW101-1-SW101-4 are used to set the secondary node address, which ranges from 00H to 0FH. Since this card requires no secondary node address, you can set these DIP switches to any values.

The DIP switches SW101-5 and SW101-6 are used to set the fan number. Table 3–110 lists the settings.

Table 3–110 Settings of DIP switches SW101-5 and SW101-6

SW101-5 SW101-6 Fan number

ON ON 6

ON OFF 2

OFF ON 4

OFF OFF 3



3-166

The DIP switches SW101-7 and SW101-8 are used to set the fan speed adjustment mode. Table 3–111 lists the settings.

Table 3–111 Settings of DIP switchesSW101-7 and SW101-8

SW101-7 SW101-8 Fan speed adjusted by

ON ON Temperature at air inlet

ON OFF Temperature at air outlet

OFF ON Reserved

OFF OFF Temperature at air inlet and stop running

Table 3–112 lists the factory settings of SW101-5 to SW101-8. Change the factory settings with caution.

Table 3–112 Factory settings of DIP switches SW101-5 to SW101-8

SW101-5 SW101-6 SW101-7 SW101-8

Factory setting OFF OFF OFF OFF

3.45 Remote Power Supply Monitoring Card–H611PWMA

3.45.1 Overview

The H611PWMA card is the remote power supply monitoring and management card. The H611PWMA card has the following features:

It provides the centralized monitoring and management function for the remote power supply at the central office.

One H611PWMA card can monitor 28 remote power supply modules. One control card can monitor multiple remote power supply modules.

Working principle of the H611PWMA card is as follows:

1) It connects all the RPS modules through the 14 RJ-45 ports of the front panel in the RS-485 mode. The cable of one RJ-45 port can connect with two modules.

2) It collects and converts relevant information of the remote power supply module, for example, alarm information. And then, it reports the information to the host through an RS-485 serial port in a centralized manner.

3.45.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–116 shows the front panel of the H611PWMA card.



3-167

POWER DOWNLINK-B DOWNLINK-A

DIP ON

Power port

Dow

nstream serial

ports of the PWM

A

UPLINK DEBUG ADDRESS ALM RUN

Upstream

serialports of the PW

MA

Debug serial port

Reset button

Slave node addressof the PW

MA

Alarm LED

Running status LED

Figure 3–116 Front panel of the H611PWMA card

Table 3–113 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H611PWMA card.

Table 3–113 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H611PWMA card


1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card has registered and is running.


The card is powered on but has not registered. RUN

The RUN LED and the ALM LED blink at the same time The card is being loaded.

1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly Alarm state, indicating the card is faulty.

OFF The card is normal. ALM

ON Communication with the host is interrupted.

Table 3–114 describes the button and the ports on the front panel of the H611PWMA card.



3-168

Table 3–114 Description of the button and the ports on the front panel of the H611PWMA card


ADDRESS

NO-1, OFF-0 Bit 1–5: DIP switch of the bus address (bit 1 is the lower bit, bit 5

is the upper bit, and the address range is 0–31). Bit 7: the downlink baud rate.

0: 4,800 1: 9,600

Bit 8: the uplink baud rate. 0: 9,600 1: 1,9200


DEGUB RS-232 for local maintenance. The communication baud rate is 4,800 bit/s.

UPLINK

RS-485. There are two RJ-45 ports in total, used to interconnect with the other two PWMA cards respectively. And then the uplink serial port of one PWMA card connects to the main control card. The communication baud rate is: 9,600 bit/s or 19,200 bit/s.

DOWNLINK-A, and DOWNLINK-B

RS-485. There are 14 RJ-45 port in total, used to interconnect with up to 28 RPS modules. One RJ-45 port can connect to two RPS modules. The communication baud rate is: 4,800 bit/s or 9,600 bit/s.

POWER For details of the pin definition, see the silkscreen on the PCB.

3.46 Secondary Power Supply Card–H602PWX0

3.46.1 Overview

The H602PWX0 secondary power supply card is the universal medium-power output power card. It provides three types of outputs:

+5 VDC –5 VDC 75 VAC, 25 Hz

An H602PWX0 card occupies one slot. It is hot swappable, and works in the hot backup mode.

Usually, two PWX cards are required in one frame. However, for the mutual-aid between frames, only one PWX card is needed.

Two H602PWX0 cards in one frame have the functions of load sharing and mutual aid. The H602PWX0 cards in different frames support the inter-frame power mutual-aid function.



3-169

The H602PWX0 card has the following features:

It supports the interlocking function when either of ±5 V power output fails, as well as the function of DC output current-limiting protection.

Each power module on the H602PWX0 card has the overtemperature protection function.

By the intelligent monitoring function, the H602PWX0 card can monitor the running status of each power module, and report the information to the control card or ESC card through serial ports in the master-slave node communication mode.

It can generate audio and visible alarms on site.

3.46.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–117 shows the front panel of the H602PWX0 card.

Running status LED

Working LED for the 75 VAC module

-48 V power input switch

Working LED for the +5 V module

Fault alarm LED

Alarm sound switch

VIN

VA0

PWX

FAIL

VB0

VC0

POWER

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ALM

(RUN)

Working LED for the -5 V module

Figure 3–117 Front panel of the H602PWX0 card

Table 3–115 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card.



3-170

Table 3–115 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card


1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The program runs normally. VIN(RUN)

Fast blinking The program runs abnormally.

ON The 75 VAC power module works normally. VAO

OFF The 75 VAC power module is faulty.

ON The +5 V power module works normally. VBO

OFF The +5 V power module is faulty.

ON The –5 V power module works normally. VCO

OFF The –5 V power module is faulty.

Blinking The card is faulty. FAIL

OFF The card works normally.

Table 3–116 describes the switches on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card.

Table 3–116 Description of the switches on the front panel of the H602PWX0 card


ON Enable the –48 V power input. POWER

OFF Disable the –48 V power input.

ON Enable the alarm sound. ALM

OFF Disable the alarm sound.


Figure 3–118 shows the layout of the H602PWX0 card.



3-171

H602PWX0

F302: output fuse of the ringing current

F301: input fuse of the ringing current

F101: -48 V power input fuse

JP10

1JP

201

Figure 3–118 Layout of the H602PWX0 card

Table 3–117 shows the settings of jumpers of the H602PWX0 card.

Table 3–117 Settings of jumpers on the H602PWX0 card

Jumper Description Meaning Factory setting

JP101 Setting of TRM end when +5 V is output.

It has been set properly before delivery. Connect pins 1-2

JP201 Setting of TRM end when –5 V is output.

It has been set properly before delivery. Connect pins 1-2

3.47 Secondary Power Supply Card–H602PWX2

3.47.1 Overview

The H602PWX2 power supply card is a universal medium-power output power card. It provides three types of outputs:

+5 VDC –5 VDC 75 VAC, 25 Hz

An H602PWX2 card occupies one slot. It is hot swappable. The card works in the hot backup mode.

Usually, two PWX cards are required in one frame. However, for the mutual-aid between frames, only one secondary power supply card is needed.



3-172

Two PWX cards in one frame have the functions of load sharing and mutual aid. The PWX cards in different frames support the inter-frame power mutual-aid function.

The H602PWX0 card has the following features:

It supports the interlocking function when either of ±5 V power output fails, as well as the function of DC output current-limiting protection.

Each power module on the H602PWX0 card has the overtemperature protection function.

The H602PWX0 card can monitor the running of the PWX card. It can generate audio and visible alarms on site.

3.47.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–119 shows the front panel of the H602PWX2 card.

VIN

VA0

PWX

FAIL

VB0

VC0

POWER

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ALM

(RUN) Running status LED

Working LED for the 75 VAC module

-48 V power input switch

Working LED for the +5 V module

Fault alarm LED

Alarm sound switch

Working LED for the -5 V module

Figure 3–119 Front panel of the H602PWX2 card

Table 3–118 describes the details on the front panel of the H602PWX2 card.



3-173

Table 3–118 Description of the LEDs on the front panel of the H602PWX2 card


1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The program runs normally.

VIN(RUN) Fast blinking The program runs abnormally.

ON The 75 VAC power module works normally. VAO

OFF The 75 VAC power module is faulty.

ON The +5V power module works normally. VBO

OFF The +5 V power module is faulty.

ON The –5 V power module works normally. VCO

OFF The –5 V power module is faulty.

Blinking The card is faulty. FAIL

OFF The card works normally.

ON Enable the –48 V power input. POWER

OFF Disable the –48 V power input.

ON Enable the alarm sound. ALM

OFF Disable the alarm sound.

3.47.3 Jumpers

Figure 3–120 shows the layout of the H602PWX2 card.



3-174

F301

F101

3

JP201

1 2

JP101

123

JP5

31

2

F302

-48 V power input fuseInput fuse of the ringing current

Output fuse of the ringing current

Figure 3–120 Layout of the H602PWX2 card

Table 3–119 shows the settings of jumpers on the H602PWX2 card.



3-175

Table 3–119 Settings of jumpers on the H602PWX2 card

Jumper Description Meaning Factory setting

JP101 Setting of TRM end when +5 V is output.

It has been set properly before delivery.

Connect pins 2-3

JP201 Setting of TRM end when –5 V is output.

It has been set properly before delivery.

Connect pins 1-2

JP5 Selection of OC gate alarm port level

Pins 1-2 are connected: low impedance Pins 2-3 are connected: high impedance

Connect pins 2-3

3.48 Subscriber Test Card–H601TSSB/H601TSSC

3.48.1 Overview

The H601TSSB/H601TSSC card is the subscriber test card. It implements the following functions:

Analog subscriber circuit and loop line test Analog telephone set test Activation/Deactivation/Feed of ISDN 2B+D subscriber port test Activation capability of ISDN digital terminal test Digital telephone set and standard NT1 port Manual test port (for subscriber cable test) Detecting alarms and sending alarm messages: detecting the secondary power

supply card alarms and report them to the control card Communicating with the APM/IPM card through the serial port, controlled by the

broadband and narrowband control card Printing the communication information with the host through the debug serial port Emulation test at the xDSL CO end Leading out circuit and loop test bus from the front panel for the external tester

Note:

The emulation test at the xDSL CO end is not performed at the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card, but at one channel of the xDSL port card, which cooperates with the control card. The H601TSSB card connects the internal bus with the external bus only.



3-176

3.48.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–121 shows the front panel of the H601TSSB card (left) and the H601TSSC card (right).

Running status LED

Manual semi-auto test bus

ISDN test port, reserved foralarm input of the PWX card

Analog subscriber circuit and loopline test port, subscriber line testport, or telephone set test port

TSSB

RUN

MTI

ISD

NLT

I

TSSC

RUN

MTI

ISD

NLT

I

Figure 3–121 Front panel of the H601TSSB card (left) and the H601TSSC card (right)

Table 3–120 describes the LED on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card.

Table 3–120 Description of the LED on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card


1s ON and 1s OFF repeatedly The card is normal. RUN

0.25s ON and 0.25s OFF repeatedly The card is abnormal.

Table 3–121 describes the ports on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card.



3-177

Table 3–121 Description of the ports on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card


MTI It provides the manual semi-auto test bus, and the corresponding RJ socket is J452.

ISDN It is reserved for the system, and the corresponding RJ socket is J453.

LTI It works as either the analog subscriber circuit and loop line test port, subscriber line test port, or the telephone set test port, and the corresponding RJ socket is J451.

Figure 3–122 shows the pin assignment of the MTI, ISDN, and LT1 ports on the front panel of the H601TSSB card.

J451

RJ45

OSLT1OSLR1

TELRLSLR1LSLT1TELTMANLMANR

J453

RJ45

TNT1T 2TNT1R 1

GND 3TDSLR 4TDSLT 5GND 6

APOWI+ 7FGND 8

J452

RJ45

MTXD232O 2MRXD232I 1

DTXD232O 3GND 4GND 5

DRXD232I 6HAUTOR 7HAUTOL 8

21

345678

21

345678

21

345678

21

345678

Figure 3–122 Pin assignment of three ports on the front panel of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card

Table 3–122 describes the pins of the three ports.

Table 3–122 Description of pins of three ports on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card

J451 Signal Description

1 OSLR1 Loop line B

2 OSLT1 Loop line A

3 TELR Telephone test B

4 ISLR1 Circuit B

5 ISLT1 Circuit A

6 TELT Telephone test A

7 MANL Signal A of 112 device test port

8 MANR Signal B of 112 device test port



3-178


1 MRXD232I Reserved

2 MTXD232O Reserved

3 DTXD232O Tx for debug and loading serial port

4 GND Ground

5 GND Ground

6 DRXD232I Rx for debug and loading serial port

7 HAUTOR Reserved

8 HAUTOR Reserved


1 TNT1R Signal B of digital telephone set port

2 TNT1T Signal A of digital telephone set port

3 GND Ground

4 TDSLR Signal B of standard NT1 port

5 TDSLT Signal A of standard NT1 port

6 GND Ground

7 APOWI+ Reserved

8 FGND Reserved


Figure 3–123 and Figure 3–124 show the pin assignment between the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card and the backplane. The figures are seen from the rear of the backplane.



3-179

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

ISLT1

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-




OSLT1PGND

RINGI-48VIN-48VIN

PGND

BGNDBGND

PGND

+5VIN+5VINGNDGND

ID0

ID1

BTXOBRXIGND

APOWI+

ISLR1OSLR1PGND

RINGI-48VIN-48VINBGNDBGND

PGND

+5VIN+5VINGNDGND

ID2

ID3

BTXOBRXIGND

ID4

Figure 3–123 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card



3-180

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12+POTS12-


+5VIN

+5VINGND

GND

GND

BGNDBGND

TX422O+RX422I+

P3TXDP3RXD

FGND

+5VIN

GNDGND

-48VIN-48VINRINGIPGNDPGNDISLT1OSLT1

GND

+5VIN

+5VIN+5VIN

IDBACI

BGNDBGND

TX422O-RX422I-

-48VIN-48VINRINGIPGNDPGNDISLR1OSRT1

Figure 3–124 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card

Table 3–123 describes the pin assignment of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card.

Table 3–123 Description of pin assignment of the H601TSSB/H601TSSC card

Signal line Meaning

ISLR1, ISLT1 The first circuit testing channel

OSLR1, OSLT1 The first loop line testing channel

RINGI PWX ringing signal (input)

–48VIN –48 V power supply

BGND –48 V power supply ground

PGND Test ground

+5VIN +5 V power supply

GND +5 V power supply ground

APOWI+ Secondary power supply alarm signal (input)

BTXO Narrowband serial port Tx channel



3-181

Signal line Meaning

BRXI Narrowband serial port Rx channel

P3RXD Broadband serial port Rx

P3TXD Broadband serial port Tx

3.49 Rear Access E1 Conversion Card–H601E1TB

3.49.1 Overview

The H601E1TB card is the rear access E1 conversion card.

The H601E1TB card resides in the HABA frame and the HABB frame. The H601E1TB card transfers E1 signals of the H601DEHA, H601EDTB, and H601TDTA cards. The two D-type connectors (44-pin) on the front panel can transfer eight channels of E1 signals.

3.49.2 Front Panel

The H601E1TB card provides two D-type connectors (44-pin) on the front panel: J3 and J4. J3 transfers the 1st–8th E1 signals, and J4 transfers the 9th–16th E1 signals. Figure 3–125 defines the pins of the connector. Where,

RX: receiving of E1 signals TX: transmitting of E1 signals RING: shielded layer of the E1 cable TIP: core of the E1 cable



3-182

RXRING1

TXTIP1TXRING1

TXTIP2TXRING2

TXTIP3TXRING3

TXTIP4TXRING4

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

15

14

13

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

TXTIP5

TXTIP6

TXTIP7

RXTIP1

RXTIP2

RXTIP3

RXTIP4

RXTIP5

RXTIP6

RXTIP7

RXTIP8

TXRING5

TXRING6

TXRING7

RXRING2

RXRING3

RXRING4

RXRING5

RXRING6

RXRING7

RXRING8

TXRING8

TXTIP8

RXRING9

TXTIP9TXRING9

TXTIP10TXRING10

TXTIP11TXRING11

TXTIP12TXRING12

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

15

14

13

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

TXTIP13

TXTIP14

TXTIP15

RXTIP9

RXTIP10

RXTIP11

RXTIP12

RXTIP13

RXTIP14

RXTIP15

RXTIP16

TXRING13

TXRING14

TXRING15

RXRING10

RXRING11

RXRING12

RXRING13

RXRING14

RXRING15

RXRING16

TXRING16

TXTIP16

J3 J4

Figure 3–125 Definition of J3 and J4 on the front panel of the card


The H601E1TB card and the backplane are connected by the DIN connectors J1 and J2. Figure 3–123 and Figure 3–127 define the pins of J1 and J2.



3-183

POTS10+

POTS11+

POTS14+

POTS15+

RXRING1TXRING1RXRING2TXRING2

RXRING9RXTIP9TXRING9TXTIP9

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596


RXTIP1TXTIP1RXTIP2TXTIP2RXTIP3TXTIP3RXTIP4TXTIP4

RXRING10RXTIP10TXRING10TXTIP10RXRING11RXTIP11TXRING11TXTIP11RXRING12RXTIP12TXRING12TXTIP12

Figure 3–126 Pin assignment between the H601E1TB card and the backplane (J1)


RXRING13RXTIP13TXRING13TXTIP13

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596


RXTIP5TXTIP5RXTIP6TXTIP6RXTIP7TXTIP7RXTIP8TXTIP8

RXRING14RXTIP14TXRING14TXTIP14RXRING15RXTIP15TXRING15TXTIP15RXRING16RXTIP16TXRING16TXTIP16

Figure 3–127 Pin assignment between the H601E1TB card and the backplane (J2)



3-184

3.50 Front Access E1 Conversion Card–H601E1TF

3.50.1 Overview

The H601E1TF card is the front access E1 conversion card.

The H601E1TF card resides in the HABD frame. The only one D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel transfers the E1 signals of the narrowband control card to the cable connecting area of the frame. Each H601E1TF card can transfer 16 channels of E1 signals.

3.50.2 Front Panel

There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601E1TF card. Figure 3–128 shows the front panel of the card.

DB-68 socket

E1TF

Figure 3–128 Front panel of the H601E1TF card

Table 3–124 defines the pins on the front panel of the H601E1TF card.

Table 3–124 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601E1TF card

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 RXA4-T 35 RXA0-T

2 RXA4-R 36 RXA0-R

3 TXA4-T 37 TXA0-T

4 TXA4-R 38 TXA0-R

5 RXA5-T 39 RXA1-T

6 RXA5-R 40 RXA1-R

7 TXA5-T 41 TXA1-T

8 TXA5-R 42 TXA1-R

9 RXA6-T 43 RXA2-T

10 RXA6-R 44 RXA2-R



3-185


11 TXA6-T 45 TXA2-T

12 TXA6-R 46 TXA2-R

13 RXA7-T 47 RXA3-T

14 RXA7-R 48 RXA3-R

15 TXA7-T 49 TXA3-T

16 TXA7-R 50 TXA3-R

19 RXB0-T 53 RXB4-T

20 RXB0-R 54 RXB4-R

21 TXB0-T 55 TXB4-T

22 TXB0-R 56 TXB4-R

23 RXB1-T 57 RXB5-T

24 RXB1-R 58 RXB5-R

25 TXB1-T 59 TXB5-T

26 TXB1-R 60 TXB5-R

27 RXB2-T 61 RXB6-T

28 RXB2-R 62 RXB6-R

29 TXB2-T 63 TXB6-T

30 TXB2-R 64 TXB6-R

31 RXB3-T 65 RXB7-T

32 RXB3-R 66 RXB7-R

33 TXB3-T 67 TXB7-T

34 TXB3-R 68 TXB7-R

The characters on the pins are shown as follows:

R or T at the beginning indicates "Rx" or "Tx" respectively. A or B indicates the narrowband control cards in slot 4 or slot 5 respectively. The numbers are the E1 serial numbers. The last R or T indicates "ring" or "tip" respectively.

3.51 Rear Access FE Conversion Card–H601EFTB

3.51.1 Overview

The H601EFTB card is the rear access FE conversion card.



3-186

The card converts the H601EAUA card. The card provides one DB68 connector with eight FE ports.

The H601EFTB card resides in the HABA frame and the HABB frame. The only one D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel transfers eight channels of FE signals.

3.51.2 Front Panel

The H601EFTB card provides only a D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel. Figure 3–129defines the pins on the front panel of the H601EFTB card. Where,

RX: receiving of FE signals TX: transmitting of FE signals +/-: +/- of the FE signal

FERX8-FERX8+

FERX0-FERX0+FETX0-FETX0+

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334

35363738394041424344454647484950515253545556575859606162636465666768

FERX1-FERX1+FETX1-FETX1+FERX2-FERX2+FETX2-FETX2+FERX3-FERX3+FETX3-FETX3+

FERX4-FERX4+FETX4-FETX4+FERX5-FERX5+FETX5-FETX5+FERX6-FERX6+FETX6-FETX6+FERX7-FERX7+FETX7-FETX7+

FETX8-FETX8+FERX9-FERX9+FETX9-FETX9+FERX10-FERX10+FETX10-FETX10+FERX11-FERX11-FETX11+FETX11+

FERX4-FERX4+FETX4-FETX4+FERX5-FERX5+FETX5-FETX5+FERX6-FERX6+FETX6-FETX6+FERX7-FERX7+FETX7-FETX7+

Figure 3–129 Definition of the pins on the front panel of the H601EFTB card



3-187


The backplane provides DIN connectors J1 and J2. Figure 3–123 and Figure 3–131 show the pin assignment between the H601E1TB and the backplane. Where,

RX: receiving of FE signals TX: transmitting of FE signals +/-: +/- of the FE signal

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12-


FERX0-FETX0-FERX1-FETX1-

FERX8+FERX8-FETX8+FETX8-

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596


FERX0+FETX0+FERX1+FETX1+FERX2+FETX2+FERX3+FETX3+

FERX9+FERX9-FETX9+FETX9-FERX10+FERX10-FETX10+FETX10-FERX11+FERX11-FETX11+FETX11-

Figure 3–130 Pin assignment between the H601EFTB card and the backplane (J1)



3-188

POTS2+

POTS4+POTS5+POTS6+

POTS0-POTS1-POTS2-



POTS12-



FERX12+FERX12-FETX12+FETX12-

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596


FERX4+FETX4+FERX5+FETX5+FERX6+FETX6+FERX7+FETX7+

FERX13+FERX13-FETX13+FETX13-FERX14+FERX14-FETX14+FETX14-FERX15+FERX15-FETX15+FETX15-

Figure 3–131 Pin assignment between the H601EFTB card and the backplane (J2)

3.52 Front Access E1/FE Conversion Card–H601EFTF

3.52.1 Overview

The H601EFTF card is the front access E1/FE conversion card.

The H601EFTF card resides in the HABD frame and the HABE frame. The only one D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel transfers 16 channels of E1 signals or eight channels of FE signals to the cable connecting area of the frame.

3.52.2 Front Panel

There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601EFTF card. Figure 3–132 shows the front panel of the card.



3-189

DB-68 socket

EFTF

Figure 3–132 Front panel of the H601EFTF card

Table 3–125 defines the pins on the front panel of the H601EFTF card.

Table 3–125 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601EFTF card


1 RXA4-T/FE_RXA4+ 35 RXA0-T/FE_RXA0+

2 RXA4-R/FE_RXA4- 36 RXA0-R/FE_RXA0-

3 TXA4-T/FE_TXA4+ 37 TXA0-T/FE_TXA0+

4 TXA4-R/FE_TXA4- 38 TXA0-R/FE_TXA0-













19 RXB0-T/FE_RXB0+ 53 RXB4-T/FE_RXB4+

20 RXB0-R/FE_RXB0- 54 RXB4-R/FE_RXB4-

21 TXB0-T/FE_TXB0+ 55 TXB4-T/FE_TXB4+

22 TXB0-R/FE_TXB0- 56 TXB4-R/FE_TXB4-




3-190













When the H601EFTF card works as the E1 conversion card, the characters on the pins are shown as follows:

R or T at the beginning indicates receiving or transmitting respectively. A or B indicates the broadband control card in slot 3 or slot 2 respectively. The numeral indicates the E1 serial number. The last R or T indicates "ring" or "tip" respectively.

When the H601EFTF card works as the FE conversion card, the characters on the pins are shown as follows:

R or T at the beginning indicates "Rx" or "Tx" respectively. A or B indicates the broadband control card in slot 2 or slot 3 respectively. The numbers are the E1 port serial numbers.

3.53 High Speed Link Conversion Card from Front Access Master Frame to Extended Frame–H601HLAF

3.53.1 Overview

The H601HLAF card is the high speed link conversion card from front access master frame to extended frame.

The H601HLAF card resides in the HABD and the HABE frame. The H601HLAF card connects to the HABF frame through the D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel.



3-191

3.53.2 Front Panel

There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601HLAF card. Figure 3–133 shows the front panel of the card.

DB-68 socket

HLAF

Figure 3–133 Front panel of the H601HLAF card

3.54 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access Extended Frame–H601HLEF

3.54.1 Overview

The H601HLEF card is the high speed link conversion card of front access extended frame.

The H601HLEF card resides in the HABF frame. The H601HLEF card connects to the HABD frame or the HABE frame through the D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel.

3.54.2 Front Panel

There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601HLEF card. Figure 3–134 shows the front panel of the card.

DB-68 socket

HLEF

Figure 3–134 Front panel of the H601HLEF card



3-192

3.55 High Speed Link Conversion Card of Front Access Slave Frame–H601HLSF

3.55.1 Overview

The H601HLSF card is the high speed link conversion card of front access slave frame.

The H601HLSF card resides in the HABD frame and the HABE frame. The H601HLSF card connects to the HABD frame and the HABE frame through the D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel.

3.55.2 Front Panel

There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601HLSF card. Figure 3–135 shows the front panel of the card.

DB-68 socket

HLSF

Figure 3–135 Front panel of the H601HLSF card

3.56 Rear Access HW Conversion Card of Master Frame–H601HWCB

3.56.1 Overview

The H601HWCB card is rear access HW conversion card of master frame.

The H601HWCB card resides in the HABA frame. The H601HWCB card provides the clock input port, E1 output port, and HW port for connecting with the HABB frame.

3.56.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–136 shows the front panel of the H601HWCB card.



3-193

BITS0

BITS1

E1port A

E1port B

HW subtending port

Figure 3–136 Front panel of the H601HWCB card

Table 3–126 describes the front panel of the H601HWCB card.

Table 3–126 Description of the front panel of the H601HWCB card

Name Connector Signal

BITS 0–1 SMB They input two channels of 2 MHz clock signals, which back up each other.

E1 port A–B DB-44 They output E1 signals from the PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4/PVM.

HW subtending port

DB-36

It subtends the following signals of the slave frame: HW signals Narrowband clock frame header signals Serial port signals Broadband clock signals Extended frame in-position signals



3-194

3.57 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Master Frame–H601HWCF

3.57.1 Overview

The H601HWCF card is the HW conversion card of the front access master frame.

The H601HWCF card resides in the HABD frame. The H601HWCF card provides one test and alarm port, one clock input port, and three HW ports for connecting with the HABE frame and HABF frame.

3.57.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–137 shows the front panel of the H601HWCF card.

RJ-45 socket

DB-28 socket

DB-28 socket

HWCF

CLK

INST

ACK

OU

TH

WO

UT1

HW

OU

T0H

WO

UT2

Figure 3–137 Front panel of the H601HWCF card

Table 3–127 describes the connectors on the front panel of the H601HWCF card.

Table 3–127 Connectors on the front panel of the H601HWCF card


CLK IN RJ-45

It inputs the following signals: Two channels of 2 MHz clock signals One channel of differential 8 kHz clock

synchronization signal One channel of differential clock selection

signal

STACK OUT DB-28

It outputs the following signals: Circuit and loop line test signals Fan frame alarm signals ESC serial port signals Broadband and narrowband RS-485 serial port

signals Power supply alarm signals RS-485 serial port signals of the fan



3-195


HWOUT0 DB-28

It outputs the following signals to the extended frame of the master frame:

HW signals Narrowband clock frame header signals Serial port signals Broadband clock signals Extended frame in-position signals

HWOUT1 DB-28

It outputs the following signals to the slave frame: HW signals Narrowband clock frame header signals Serial port signals Broadband clock signals Extended frame in-position signals

HWOUT2 DB-28

It outputs the following signals to the extended frame of the slave frame:

HW signals Narrowband clock frame header signals Serial port signals Broadband clock signals Slave frame in-position signals

3.58 HW Conversion Card of Rear Access Slave Frame–H601HWTB

3.58.1 Overview

The H601HWTB card is HW conversion card of the rear access slave frame.

The H601HWTB card resides in the HABB frame. The H601HWTB card provides subtending ports for connecting with the HABA frame.

3.58.2 Front Panel

There is only a HW subtending port on the front panel of the H601HWTB card.

Table 3–128 describes the front panel of the H601HWTB card.



3-196

Table 3–128 Description of the port on the front panel of the H601HWTB card

Name Port Signal

HW subtending port

DB-36

It subtends the following signals of the master frame:

HW signals Narrowband clock frame header

signals Serial port signals Broadband clock signals Extended frame in-position signals

3.59 HW Conversion Card of Front Access Extended Frame–H601HWTF

3.59.1 Overview

The H601HWTF card is the HW conversion card of the front access extended frame

The H601HWTF card resides in the HABE frame and the HABF frame. The H601HWTF card provides two test and alarm ports, one clock output port, and one HW signal subtending port for connecting with the HABD frame.

3.59.2 Front Panel

Figure 3–138 shows the front panel of the H601HWTF card.

RJ-45 socket

DB-28 socket

DB-28 socket

HWTF

CLK

OUT

STAC

K OU

THW

IN

STAC

K IN

Figure 3–138 Front panel of the H601HWTF card

Table 3–129 describes the connectors on the front panel of the H601HWTF card.



3-197

Table 3–129 Connectors on the front panel of the H601HWTF card


CLK OUT RJ-45 It outputs the following signals:

Different 8k clock signals Differential clock selection signals

STACK OUT DB-28

It outputs the following signals: Circuit and loop line test signals Fan frame alarm signals Power alarm signals RS-485 serial port signals of the fan

STACK IN DB-28

It inputs the following signals: Circuit and loop line test signals Fan frame alarm signals Power alarm signals RS-485 serial port signals of the fan

HWIN DB-28

It inputs the following signals: Slave/extended frame HW signals Narrowband clock frame header signals Serial port signals Broadband clock signals In-position signals of the slave/extended frame

3.60 32-Port Relay Rear Access Conversion Card–H601RATB

3.60.1 Overview

The H601RATB card is the 32-port rear-access relay conversion card.

The H601RATB card realizes conversion among the following cables:

frame subscriber cable line card lead-in cable circuit and loop test line of the frame

In this way, it realizes the circuit and loop line test function and the port backup function for line cards.

The H601RATB card is designed for the 32-port line card. However, it is also suitable for the 16-port line card. Besides the PCB, the 32-port relay card can also be used on the 16-port service card.

The H601RATB card has the following features:

It provides rear-access line for the 32-port service card. It features the circuit and loop line test function. You can carry out the circuit test

and the loop line test at the same time without affecting each other. It features the port backup function.



3-198

It features the circuit and loop line test function by using two buses. During the circuit and loop line test for the broadband service, the narrowband

service can be disconnected or not.

3.60.2 Front Panel

The front panel of the H601RATB card uses the DIN connector for front access.

Figure 3–139 shows the pin assignment on the front panel of the H601RATB card.

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596




LINEA8LINEB8LINEA9LINEB9LINEA10LINEB10LINEA11LINEB11

LINEA12LINEB12LINEA13LINEB13LINEA14LINEB14LINEA15LINEB15LINEA16LINEB16LINEA17LINEB17LINEA18LINEB18LINEA19LINEB19

LINEA20LINEB20LINEA21LINEB21LINEA22LINEB22LINEA23

LINEB23


Figure 3–139 Pin assignment on the front panel of the H601RATB card


The H601RATB card connects with the backplane through J1 and J2. Figure 3–140 and Figure 3–141 define J1 and J2 between the H601RATB card and the backplane.



3-199

ASL_B6

ASL_B0ASL_B1ASL_B2ASL_B3ASL_B4ASL_B5

ASL_B7

GNDGND

GNDGND

GND

GND

GND

B_ITB1B_OTB1

123456

789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829303132

ASL_A8ASL_B8ASL_A9ASL_B9ASL_A10ASL_B10ASL_A11ASL_B11

ASL_A12ASL_B12ASL_A13ASL_B13ASL_A14ASL_B14ASL_A15ASL_B15VCC

GND

ASL_A0ASL_A1

ASL_A3ASL_A4ASL_A5ASL_A6ASL_A7B_ITA1B_OTA1GNDGND

GNDGND

VCC

GND

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152

535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384

858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–140 Pin assignment of connector J1



3-200

ASL_B30

ASL_B24ASL_B25ASL_B26ASL_B27ASL_B28ASL_B29

ASL_B31

GNDGND

GNDGND

GND

GNDB_ITB2B_OTB2

GND

GND

ASL_A16ASL_B16ASL_A17ASL_B17ASL_A18ASL_B18ASL_A19ASL_B19ASL_A20ASL_B20ASL_A21ASL_B21ASL_A22ASL_B22ASL_A23ASL_B23

GND

ASL_A24ASL_A25ASL_A26ASL_A27ASL_A28ASL_A29ASL_A30ASL_A31

B_ITA2B_OTA2

GNDGND

GNDGND

GND

GND

GNDGND

123456

78910111213141516171819202122

23242526272829303132

1234567891011121314

15161718192021222324252627282930

3132

1234567891011121314

15161718192021222324252627282930

3132

1234567891011121314

15161718192021222324252627282930

3132

3334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

6566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596

Figure 3–141 Pin assignment of connector J2

Table 3–130 lists pins on the H601RATB card.

Table 3–130 Pins on the H601RATB card

Signal Number Description

ASL_A0–A31 32 Loop line A

ASL_B0–B31 32 Loop line B

OTA/OTB 4 Loop line test bus

ITA/ITB 2 Circuit test bus

VCC 3 5 V power supply for the relay card

GND 2 Ground

3.61 32-Port Front Access Relay Conversion Card–H601RATF

3.61.1 Overview

The H601RATF card is the 32-port front access relay conversion card.



3-201

The H601RATF card realizes conversion among the following cables:

frame subscriber cable line card lead-in cable circuit and loop test line of the frame

In this way, it realizes the circuit and loop line test function and the port backup function for line cards.

The H601RATF card is designed for the 32-port line card. However, it is also suitable for the 16-port line card. Besides the PCB, the 32-port relay card can also be used on the 16-port service card.

The H601RATF card has the following features:

It provides front-access line for the 32-port service card. It features the circuit and loop line test function. You can carry out the circuit test

and the loop line test at the same time without affecting each other. It features the port backup function. It features the circuit and loop line test function using two buses. During the circuit and loop line test for the broadband service, the narrowband

service can be disconnected or not.

3.61.2 Front Panel

The front panel of the H601RATF card has only a DB68 port, which leads in 32 pairs of subscriber lines, as shown in Figure 3–142.



3-202

LINE_B8LINE_A8LINE_B9LINE_A9LINE_B10LINE_A10LINE_B11LINE_A11


12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334

35363738394041424344454647484950515253545556575859606162636465666768


LINEB16LINE_A16LINE_B17LINE_A17LINE_B18LINE_A18LINE_B19LINE_A19LINE_B20LINE_A20LINE_B21LINE_A21LINE_B22LINE_A22LINE_B23LINE_A23


LINE_B24LINE_A24LINE_B25LINE_A25LINE_B26LINE_A26LINE_B27LINE_A27LINE_B28LINE_A28LINE_B29LINE_A29LINE_B30LINE_A30LINE_B31LINE_A31

Figure 3–142 Ports on the front panel of the H601RATF card


Figure 3–143 shows the pin assignment between the H601RATF card and the backplane.



3-203

101

1002524232221201918171615

1110987654321

2524232221201918171615

1110987654321

2524232221201918171615

1110987654321

2524232221201918171615

1110987654321

2524232221201918171615

1110987654321

ASL_B5ASL_A5ASL_A6ASL_B7ASL_A7ASL_B13ASL_A14ASL_B14ASL_A15

VCC

ASL_B29ASL_A29ASL_A30ASL_B31ASL_A31ASL_B21ASL_A22ASL_B22ASL_A23

125124123122121120119118117116115

111110109108107106105104103102

ASL_A4

ASL_B6ASL_B12

ASL_A13B_ITA1

ASL_B15

ASL_A28

ASL_B30ASL_B20

ASL_A21B_ITA2

ASL_B23

99989796959493929190

8685848382818079787776

ASL_B4

ASL_B11ASL_A12

ASL_A3

B_ITB1

ASL_B28ASL_A27

ASL_A20ASL_B19

B_ITB2B_OTA2

B_OTA1

7574737271706968676665

6160595857565554535251

ASL_B1

ASL_A11ASL_A10

ASL_B3

VCC

ASL_B25ASL_B27

ASL_A18ASL_A19

GND

B_OTB2

B_OTB1ASL_A8

ASL_A16

5049484746454443424140

3635343332313029282726

ASL_A2ASL_B2ASL_A1ASL_A0ASL_B0ASL_B10ASL_B9ASL_A9ASL_B8

VCC

ASL_A26ASL_B26ASL_A25ASL_A24ASL_B24ASL_B18ASL_B17ASL_A17ASL_B16

GND

2524232221201918171615

1110987654321

Figure 3–143 Pin assignment on the front panel of the H601RATF card

Table 3–131 lists pins on the H601RATF card.

Table 3–131 Pins on the H601RATF card

Signal Number Description

ASL_A0–A31 32 Loop line A

ASL_B0–B31 32 Loop line B

OTA/OTB 4 Loop line test bus

ITA/ITB 2 Circuit test bus

VCC 3 5 V power supply for the relay card

GND 2 Ground

3.62 Front Access Subscriber Cable Conversion Card–H601SLTF

3.62.1 Overview

The H601SLTF card is the front access subscriber cable conversion card.

The H601SLTF card resides in the HABD, HABE and HABF frames. The D-type connector (68-pin) on the front panel transfers 32 channels of xSL subscriber signals or 16 channels of E1 signals to the cable connecting area of the frame.



3-204

3.62.2 Front Panel

There is only a DB-68 socket on the front panel of the H601SLTF card. Figure 3–144 shows the front panel of the card.

DB-68 socket

SLTF

Figure 3–144 Front panel of the H601SLTF card

Table 3–132 defines the pins on the front panel of the H601SLTF card.

When the H601SLTF card works as the xDSL subscriber cable conversion card, "A0"–"A31" indicate A loop lines 0–31, and "B0"–"B31" indicate B loop lines 0–31.

When the H601SLTF card works as the E1 conversion card, the meanings of the characters on the pins are as follows:

The first R or T indicates "Rx" or "Tx" respectively. The numeral indicates the E1 serial number. The last R or T indicates "ring" or "tip" respectively.

Table 3–132 Definition of pins on the front panel of the H601SLTF card


1 B8/RX8-T 35 B0/RX0-R

2 A8/RX8-R 36 A0/RX0-T

3 B9/TX8-T 37 B1/TX0-R

4 A9/TX8-R 38 A1/TX0-T

5 B10/RX9-T 39 B2/RX1-R

6 A10/RX9-R 40 A2/RX1-T

7 B11/TX9-T 41 B3/TX1-R

8 A11/TX9-R 42 A3/TX1-T

9 B12/RX10-T 43 B4/RX2-R

10 A12/RX10-R 44 A4/RX2-T

11 B13/TX10-T 45 B5/TX2-R

12 A13/TX10-R 46 A5/TX2-T



3-205


13 B14/RX11-T 47 B6/RX3-R

14 A14/RX11-R 48 A6/RX3-T

15 B15/TX11-T 49 B7/TX3-R

16 A15/TX11-R 50 A7/TX3-T

19 B24/RX4-R 53 B16/RX12-T

20 A24/RX4-T 54 A16/RX12-R

21 B25/TX4-R 55 B17/TX12-T

22 A25/TX4-T 56 A17/TX12-R

23 B26/RX5-R 57 B18/RX13-T

24 A26/RX5-T 58 A18/RX13-R

25 B27/TX5-R 59 B19/TX13-T

26 A27/TX5-T 60 A19/TX13-R

27 B28/RX6-R 61 B20

28 A28/RX6-T 62 A20/RX14-R

29 B29/TX6-R 63 B21/TX14-T

30 A29/TX6-T 64 A21/TX14-R

31 B30/TX7-R 65 B22/RX15-T

32 A30/RX7-T 66 A22/RX15-R

33 B31/TX7-R 67 B23/TX15-T

34 A31/TX7-T 68 A23/TX15-R

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 4 Introduction to Front-Access Cables


4-1

Chapter 4 Introduction to Front-Access Cables

4.1 About This Chapter The front-access cables of the UA5000 include:

Trunk cable Subtending cable Subscriber cable Maintenance cable Signal cable Optical fiber

4.2 Trunk Cable

4.2.1 Overview of Trunk Cable

The UA5000 uses the following front-access trunk cables:

E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF IPMB upstream cable Trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB Trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000

4.2.2 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables from DEHA to DDF. Each type provides 16 E1 channels.

When the AIUB is configured with the H601CESA subcard, it can provide eight E1 ports. In this case, the AIUB uses the 1st–8th E1 channels of the trunk cable.

4.2.3 75-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

I. Outline

Figure 4–1 shows the outline of the trunk cable.



4-2

X1

D-type connector(68-pin, male)

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Main label

Coaxial cable

Label

Figure 4–1 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

Table 4–1 describes the labels on the trunk cable.

Table 4–1 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

Label Meaning

W1(1–4) E1 The 1st–4th channels of E1 signals

W2(9–12) E1 The 9th–12th channels of E1 signals



II. Pin assignment

Table 4–2 shows the pin assignment of the trunk cable.

Note:

In Table 4–2, serial number "SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on the cable jacket. The meaning of the "R/T relationship" is as follows:

R1: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the AIUB/DEHA/EDTB side. T1: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the AIUB/DEHA/EDTB side.

Table 4–2 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

Connector X1 Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship

35 Ring

36 Tip 1 R1

37 Ring 2 T1



4-3


38 Tip

39 Ring

40 Tip 3 R2

41 Ring

42 Tip 4 T2

43 Ring

44 Tip 5 R3

45 Ring

46 Tip 6 T3

47 Ring

48 Tip 7 R4

49 Ring

50 Tip 8 T4


2 Ring

1 Tip 1 R9

4 Ring

3 Tip 2 T9

6 Ring

5 Tip 3 R10

8 Ring

7 Tip 4 T10

10 Ring

9 Tip 5 R11

12 Ring

11 Tip 6 T11

14 Ring

13 Tip 7 R12

16 Ring

15 Tip 8 T12



4-4


19 Ring

20 Tip 1 R5

21 Ring

22 Tip 2 T5

23 Ring

24 Tip 3 R6

25 Ring

26 Tip 4 T6

27 Ring

28 Tip 5 R7

29 Ring

30 Tip 6 T7

31 Ring

32 Tip 7 R8

33 Ring

34 Tip 8 T8


54 Ring

53 Tip 1 R13

56 Ring

55 Tip 2 T13

58 Ring

57 Tip 3 R14

60 Ring

59 Tip 4 T14

62 Ring

61 Tip 5 R15

64 Ring

63 Tip 6 T15

66 Ring

65 Tip 7 R16



4-5


68 Ring

67 Tip 8 T16

4.2.4 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

I. Outline


X1

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

D-type connector(68-pin, male) Main label Label

Twisted pair

Figure 4–2 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF


Table 4–3 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

Label Meaning



II. Pin assignment


Note:

In Table 4–4, the meaning of the "R/T relationship" is as follows: R1: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the AIUB/DEHA/EDTB side. T1: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the AIUB/DEHA/EDTB side.



4-6

Table 4–4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

Connector X1 Tip color & relationship R/T relationship

35 White

36 Blue Twisted R1

37 White

38 Orange Twisted T1

39 White

40 Green Twisted R2

41 White

42 Brown Twisted T2

43 White

44 Gray Twisted R3

45 Red

46 Blue Twisted T3

47 Red

48 Orange Twisted R4

49 Red

50 Green Twisted T4

19 Red

20 Brown Twisted R5

21 Red

22 Gray Twisted T5

23 Black

24 Blue Twisted R6

25 Black


27 Black

28 Green Twisted R7

29 Black

30 Brown Twisted T7

31 Black

32 Gray Twisted R8

33 Yellow Twisted T8



4-7


34 Blue


2 White

1 Blue Twisted R9

4 White

3 Orange Twisted T9

6 White

5 Green Twisted R10

8 White

7 Brown Twisted T10

10 White

9 Gray Twisted R11

12 Red

11 Blue Twisted T11

14 Red


16 Red

15 Green Twisted T12

54 Red

53 Brown Twisted R13

56 Red

55 Gray Twisted T13

58 Black

57 Blue Twisted R14

60 Black


62 Black

61 Green Twisted R15

64 Black

63 Brown Twisted T15

66 Black Twisted R16



4-8


65 Gray

68 Yellow

67 Blue Twisted T16

4.2.5 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables from APMB to DDF. Each type provides 16 E1 channels.

When the APMB is configured with the H601CESA subcard, it can provide eight E1 ports. In this case, the APMB in the left half of the frame (front view of the frame) uses the 1st–8th E1 channels of the trunk cable, and the APMB in the right half uses the 9th–16th E1 chanels.

4.2.6 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF

I. Outline


X1

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

D-type connector(68-pin, male)Main labelCoaxial cable

Label

Figure 4–3 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF


Table 4–5 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF

Label Meaning







4-9

II. Pin assignment


Note:

In Table 4–6, SN in "Coaxial cable & SN" is the print on the cable jacket. The meaning of "R/T relationship" is as follows:

R1: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the APMB side. T1: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the APMB side.

Table 4–6 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF


35 Ring

36 Tip 1 R1

37 Ring

38 Tip 2 T1

39 Ring

40 Tip 3 R2

41 Ring

42 Tip 4 T2

43 Ring

44 Tip 5 R3

45 Ring

46 Tip 6 T3

47 Ring

48 Tip 7 R4

49 Ring

50 Tip 8 T4


2 Ring

1 Tip 1 R5

4 Ring 2 T5



4-10


3 Tip

6 Ring

5 Tip 3 R6

8 Ring

7 Tip 4 T6

10 Ring

9 Tip 5 R7

12 Ring

11 Tip 6 T7

14 Ring

13 Tip 7 R8

16 Ring

15 Tip 8 T8


19 Ring

20 Tip 1 R9

21 Ring

22 Tip 2 T9

23 Ring

24 Tip 3 R10

25 Ring

26 Tip 4 T10

27 Ring

28 Tip 5 R11

29 Ring

30 Tip 6 T11

31 Ring

32 Tip 7 R12

33 Ring

34 Tip 8 T12



4-11


54 Ring

53 Tip 1 R13

56 Ring

55 Tip 2 T13

58 Ring

57 Tip 3 R14

60 Ring

59 Tip 4 T14

62 Ring

61 Tip 5 R15

64 Ring

63 Tip 6 T15

66 Ring

65 Tip 7 R16

68 Ring

67 Tip 8 T16


I. Outline


X1


Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Main label

Label





4-12


Label Meaning



II. Pin assignment


Note:

In Table 4–8, the meaning of "R/T relationship" is as follows: R1: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the APMB side. T1: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the APMB side.



35 White

36 Blue Twisted R1

37 White


39 White

40 Green Twisted R2

41 White

42 Brown Twisted T2

43 White

44 Gray Twisted R3

45 Red

46 Blue Twisted T3

47 Red


49 Red

50 Green Twisted T4

2 Red Twisted R5



4-13


1 Brown

4 Red

3 Gray Twisted T5

6 Black

5 Blue Twisted R6

8 Black

7 Orange Twisted T6

10 Black

9 Green Twisted R7

12 Black

11 Brown Twisted T7

14 Black

13 Gray Twisted R8

16 Yellow

15 Blue Twisted T8


19 White

20 Blue Twisted R9

21 White


23 White


25 White


27 White

28 Gray Twisted R11

29 Red

30 Blue Twisted T11

31 Red


33 Red Twisted T12



4-14


34 Green

54 Red


56 Red

55 Gray Twisted T13

58 Black

57 Blue Twisted R14

60 Black


62 Black


64 Black


66 Black

65 Gray Twisted R16

68 Yellow

67 Blue Twisted T16

4.2.8 E3/T3 Trunk Cable from APMB to DDF

I. Overview of the E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF

When the APMB is configured with the E23F or E13F subcard, it provides two or one E3 port.

When the APMB is configured with T23F or T13F subcard, it provides two or one T3 port.

The E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF has two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each type provides one E3/T3 channel.

II. 75-ohm E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF




4-15

SMB coaxialconnector (female) Main label

X1 Coaxial cable

Figure 4–5 Outline of the 75-ohm E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF

III. 120-ohm E3/T3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF

The 75-ohm E3/T3 trunk cable can be converted to the 120-ohm trunk cable. The conversion cable consists of two parts:

75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable Cable to the DDF

IV. 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable

One end of the conversion cable is an SMB connector, connected to the electrical port of the E23F, E13F, T23F or T13F subcard. The other end is a 8-pin female network port.

Figure 4–6 shows the outline of the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable.

X2

X3

SMB connector(female) Label

1

8

8-pin network portTwisted pairCoaxial cable

Figure 4–6 Outline of the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable

Table 4–9 describes the labels on the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable.

Table 4–9 Labels on the 75-ohm to 120-ohm conversion cable

Label Connector Meaning

TO B75 T X2 75-ohm conversion: E1 signal transmitting

TO B75 R X3 75-ohm conversion: E1 signal receiving

V. Cable to the DDF

Figure 4–7 shows the cable to the DDF.



4-16

81

8-pin network portconnectorLabel

Twisted pair

Figure 4–7 Outline of the cable to the DDF

Table 4–10 describes the labels on the cable to the DDF.

Table 4–10 Labels on the cable to the DDF

Label Meaning

R 120-ohm conversion: E1 signal transmitting

T 120-ohm conversion: E1 signal receiving

Table 4–11 shows the pin assignment of the E3/T3 cable to the DDF.

Note:

In Table 4–11, the meaning of "R/T relationship" is as follows: R: Receiving of the E3/T3 signals at the APMB side. T: Transmitting of the E3/T3 signals at the APMB side.

Table 4–11 Pin assignment of the E3/T3 cable to the DDF

Cable branch Connector X1 Tip color & relationship R/T relationship

1 Blue W1

2 White Twisted R

4 Orange W2

5 White Twisted T

4.2.9 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000

There are four types of E1 trunk cables from APMB to Metro 1000. Each type provides 16 E1 channels.

75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1



4-17

75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2

When the APMB is configured with the H601CESA subcard, it can provide eight E1 ports. In this case, the APMB in the left half of the frame (front view of the frame) uses the 1st–8th E1 channels of the trunk cable, and the APMB in the right half uses the 9th–16th E1 channels.

SS42SP1 and SS42SP2 are the E1 tributary cards of the Metro 1000.

75 ohms and 120 ohms are the matching impedance of the E1 transmission terminal. In general, for the 75-ohm matching impedance matching impedance, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable). For the 120-ohm matching impedance matching impedance, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric cable pair). To select the matching impedance, ensure that the DIP switch of the card and the Metro 1000 is set correctly and the data is consistent.

4.2.10 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1

I. Outline


X1

X9

X2

X3

X8

2mmFB wireconnector

Main label

Coaxial cable


1

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Label

6

abcd

Figure 4–8 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1


Table 4–12 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1


(1–2) E1 X2 The 1st–2nd channels of E1 signals

(3–4) E1 X3 The 3rd–4th channels of E1 signals

(5–6) E1 X4 The 5th–6th channels of E1 signals



4-18







II. Pin assignment


Note:



Table 4–13 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1

Connector X1 Connector X2 Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship

35 a5 Ring

36 a6 Tip 1 R1

37 d4 Ring

38 d3 Tip 2 T1

39 a3 Ring

40 a4 Tip 3 R2

41 d2 Ring

42 d1 Tip 4 T2


43 a5 Ring

44 a6 Tip 5 R3

45 d4 Ring 6 T3



4-19


46 d3 Tip

47 a3 Ring

48 a4 Tip 7 R4

49 d2 Ring

50 d1 Tip 8 T4


2 a5 Ring

1 a6 Tip 1 R5

4 d4 Ring

3 d3 Tip 2 T5

6 a3 Ring

5 a4 Tip 3 R6

8 d2 Ring

7 d1 Tip 4 T6


10 a5 Ring

9 a6 Tip 5 R7

12 d4 Ring

11 d3 Tip 6 T7

14 a3 Ring

13 a4 Tip 7 R8

16 d2 Ring

15 d1 Tip 8 T8


19 a5 Ring

20 a6 Tip 1 R9

21 d4 Ring

22 d3 Tip 2 T9



4-20


23 a3 Ring

24 a4 Tip 3 R10

25 d2 Ring

26 d1 Tip 4 T10


27 a5 Ring

28 a6 Tip 5 R11

29 d4 Ring

30 d3 Tip 6 T11

31 a3 Ring

32 a4 Tip 7 R12

33 d2 Ring

34 d1 Tip 8 T12


54 a5 Ring

53 a6 Tip 1 R13

56 d4 Ring

55 d3 Tip 2 T13

58 a3 Ring

57 a4 Tip 3 R14

60 d2 Ring

59 d1 Tip 4 T14


62 a5 Ring

61 a6 Tip 5 R15

64 d4 Ring

63 d3 Tip 6 T15

66 a3 Ring 7 R16



4-21


65 a4 Tip

68 d2 Ring

67 d1 Tip 8 T16


I. Outline


X1X2

X3

X8

X9 D-type connector(68-pin, male)

2mmFB wireconnector

Twisted pair

Main label

Label

Heat shrink tube

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

1 6

abcd





(1–2) E1 X1 The 1st–2nd channels of E1 signals

(3–4) E1 X2 The 3rd–4th channels of E1 signals









4-22

II. Pin assignment


Note:



Connector X1 Connector X2 Tip color & relationship R/T relationship

35 a5 White

36 a6 Blue Twisted R1

37 d4 White

38 d3 Orange Twisted T1

39 a3 White

40 a4 Green Twisted R2

41 d2 White

42 d1 Brown Twisted T2


43 a5 White

44 a6 Gray Twisted R3

45 d4 Red

46 d3 Blue Twisted T3

47 a3 Red

48 a4 Orange Twisted R4

49 d2 Red

50 d1 Green Twisted T4



4-23


2 a5 Red

1 a6 Brown Twisted R5

4 d4 Red

3 d3 Gray Twisted T5

6 a3 Black


8 d2 Black



10 a5 Black


12 d4 Black


14 a3 Black


16 d2 Black



19 a5 White


21 d4 White


23 a3 White


25 d2 White



27 a5 White Twisted R11



4-24


28 a6 Gray

29 d4 Red


31 a3 Red


33 d2 Red



54 a5 Red

53 a6 Brown Twisted R13

56 d4 Red

55 d3 Gray Twisted T13

58 a3 Black


60 d2 Black



62 a5 Black


64 d4 Black


66 a3 Black


68 d2 Black



I. Outline




4-25

X2

X51 6

abcd

2mmFB wire connector

Label

Main label

Coaxial cable


Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35X1

Figure 4–10 Outline of the 75-ohm trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2




(1–4) E1 X2 The 1st–4th channels of E1 signals




II. Pin assignment


Note:





35 a6 Ring

36 b6 Tip 1 R1

37 d6 Ring 2 T1



4-26


38 c6 Tip

39 a4 Ring

40 a5 Tip 3 R2

41 d4 Ring

42 d5 Tip 4 T2

43 a2 Ring

44 a3 Tip 5 R3

45 d2 Ring

46 d3 Tip 6 T3

47 b1 Ring

48 a1 Tip 7 R4

49 c1 Ring

50 d1 Tip 8 T4


2 a6 Ring

1 b6 Tip 1 R5

4 d6 Ring

3 c6 Tip 2 T5

6 a4 Ring

5 a5 Tip 3 R6

8 d4 Ring

7 d5 Tip 4 T6

10 a2 Ring

9 a3 Tip 5 R7

12 d2 Ring

11 d3 Tip 6 T7

14 b1 Ring

13 a1 Tip 7 R8

16 c1 Ring

15 d1 Tip 8 T8



4-27


19 a6 Ring

20 b6 Tip 1 R9

21 d6 Ring

22 c6 Tip 2 T9

23 a4 Ring

24 a5 Tip 3 R10

25 d4 Ring

26 d5 Tip 4 T10

27 a2 Ring

28 a3 Tip 5 R11

29 d2 Ring

30 d3 Tip 6 T11

31 b1 Ring

32 a1 Tip 7 R12

33 c1 Ring

34 d1 Tip 8 T12


54 a6 Ring

53 b6 Tip 1 R13

56 d6 Ring

55 c6 Tip 2 T13

58 a4 Ring

57 a5 Tip 3 R14

60 d4 Ring

59 d5 Tip 4 T14

62 a2 Ring

61 a3 Tip 5 R15

64 d2 Ring

63 d3 Tip 6 T15

66 b1 Ring

65 a1 Tip 7 R16



4-28


68 c1 Ring

67 d1 Tip 8 T16


I. Outline


X2

X5

X1

2mmFB wire connector

Label

Main labelD-type connector

(68-pin, male)Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

1 6

abcd

Twisted pair

Figure 4–11 Outline of the 120-ohm trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2




(1–4) E1 X2 The 1st–4th channels of E1 signals




II. Pin assignment




4-29

Note:

In Table 4–19, the meaning of "R/T relationship" is as follows:




35 a6 White

36 b6 Blue Twisted R1

37 d6 White

38 c6 Orange Twisted T1

39 a4 White


41 d4 White


43 a2 White


45 d2 Red


47 b1 Red


49 c1 Red



2 a6 Red

1 b6 Brown Twisted R5

4 d6 Red

3 c6 Gray Twisted T5

6 a4 Black




4-30


8 d4 Black


10 a2 Black


12 d2 Black


14 b1 Black


16 c1 Black



19 a6 White

20 b6 Blue Twisted R9

21 d6 White

22 c6 Orange Twisted T9

23 a4 White


25 d4 White


27 a2 White


29 d2 Red


31 b1 Red


33 c1 Red



54 a6 Red Twisted R13



4-31


53 b6 Brown

56 d6 Red

55 c6 Gray Twisted T13

58 a4 Black


60 d4 Black


62 a2 Black


64 d2 Black


66 b1 Black


68 c1 Black


4.2.14 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF

There are two types of E1/SHDSL trunk cables from H303HSL to DDF: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each type provides two E1 channels and two SHDSL channels.

4.2.15 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF

I. Outline




4-32

X

Main labelPos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35


Coaxial cable

Twisted pair

Label

Figure 4–12 Outline of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Table 4–20 and Table 4–21 describe the labels on the trunk cable.

Table 4–20 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I)

Label Meaning

T0 Tx of the 1st E1 port

R0 Rx of the 1st E1 port

T1 Tx of the 2nd E1 port

R1 Rx of the 2nd E1 port

Table 4–21 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II)

Label Meaning

H521SDL channel 0 The 1st SHDSL port

H521SDL channel 1 The 2nd SHDSL port

II. Pin assignment

Table 4–22 and Table 4–23 show the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF.



4-33

Note:


R0: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the H303HSL side. T0: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the H303HSL side.

Table 4–22 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I)

Connector X Tip color & SN R/T relationship

36 Tip

35 Ring 1 T0

38 Tip

37 Ring 2 R0

40 Tip

39 Ring 3 T1

42 Tip

41 Ring 4 R1

Table 4–23 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II)

Connector X Tip color Tip point color Relationship Port No.

32 Pink Red

31 Pink Black Twisted 0

34 Orange Red

33 Orange Black Twisted 1

4.2.16 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H303HSL to DDF

I. Outline




4-34

X

Main label Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35


Twisted pair

Label

Figure 4–13 Outline of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF


Table 4–24 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I)

Label Meaning





Table 4–25 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II)

Label Meaning



II. Pin assignment

Table 4–26 and Table 4–27 show the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF.



4-35

Note:

In Table 4–26, the meaning of "R/T relationship" is as follows: R0: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the H303HSL side. T0: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the H303HSL side.

Table 4–26 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (I)

Connector X Tip color Relationship R/T relationship

36 White

35 Blue Twisted T0

38 White


40 White

39 Green Twisted T1

42 White

41 Brown Twisted R1

Table 4–27 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (II)


32 Pink Red


34 Orange Red


4.2.17 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF

There are two types of E1/SHDSL trunk cables from H521SDL to DDF: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each type provides four E1 channels and four SHDSL channels.

4.2.18 75-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF

I. Outline




4-36

X

Main labelPos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35


Coaxial cable

Twisted pair

Label

Figure 4–14 Outline of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF


Table 4–28 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I)

Label Meaning





T2 Tx of the 3rd E1 port

R2 Rx of the 3rd E1 port

T3 Tx of the 4th E1 port

R3 Rx of the 4th E1 port

Table 4–29 Labels on the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II)

Label Meaning



H521SDL channel 2 The 3rd SHDSL port

H521SDL channel 3 The 4th SHDSL port

II. Pin assignment

Table 4–30 and Table 4–31 show the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF.



4-37

Note:


R0: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the H521SDL side. T0: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the H521SDL side.

Table 4–30 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I)

Connector X Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship

36 Tip

35 Ring 1 T0

38 Tip

37 Ring 2 R0

40 Tip

39 Ring 3 T1

42 Tip

41 Ring 4 R1

44 Tip

43 Ring 5 T2

46 Tip

45 Ring 6 R2

48 Tip

47 Ring 7 T3

50 Tip

49 Ring 8 R3

Table 4–31 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II)


28 Pink Red


30 Orange Red




4-38


32 Green Red

31 Green Black Twisted 2

34 Blue Red

33 Blue Black Twisted 3

4.2.19 120-ohm E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF

I. Outline


X

Main label Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35


Twisted pair

Label

Figure 4–15 Outline of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF


Table 4–32 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I)

Label Meaning





T2 Tx of the 3rd E1 port

R2 Rx of the 3rd E1 port

T3 Tx of the 4th E1 port

R3 Rx of the 4th E1 port



4-39

Table 4–33 Labels on the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II)

Label Meaning



H521SDL channel 2 The 3rd SHDSL port

H521SDL channel 3 The 4th SHDSL port

II. Pin assignment

Table 4–34 and Table 4–35 show the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF.

Note:

In Table 4–34, the meaning of "R/T relationship" is as follows: R0: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the H521SDL side. T0: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the H521SDL side.

Table 4–34 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (I)

Connector X Tip color & Relationship R/T relationship

36 White

35 Blue Twisted T0

38 White


40 White

39 Green Twisted T1

42 White

41 Brown Twisted R1

44 White

43 Gray Twisted T2

46 Red

45 Blue Twisted R2

48 Red Twisted T3



4-40

Connector X Tip color & Relationship R/T relationship

47 Orange

50 Red

49 Green Twisted R3

Table 4–35 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF (II)


28 Pink Red


30 Orange Red


32 Green Red

31 Green Black Twisted 2

34 Blue Red

33 Blue Black Twisted 3

4.2.20 IPMB FE Upstream Cable

The FE upstream cable uses the straight through cable.

4.2.21 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB

The trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB has two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each type provides 16 E1 channels.

4.2.22 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB

I. Outline




4-41

X1 X2

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Main labelCoaxial cable



Figure 4–16 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB

II. Pin assignment


Note:

In Table 4–36, SN in "Coaxial cable & SN" is the print on the cable jacket.

Table 4–36 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB

Connector X1 Connector X2 Coaxial cable & SN

35 37 Ring

36 38 Tip 1

37 35 Ring

38 36 Tip 2

39 41 Ring

40 42 Tip 3

41 39 Ring

42 40 Tip 4

43 45 Ring

44 46 Tip 5

45 43 Ring

46 44 Tip 6

47 48 Ring

48 50 Tip 7



4-42


49 47 Ring

50 48 Tip 8


2 4 Ring

1 3 Tip 1

4 2 Ring

3 1 Tip 2

6 8 Ring

5 7 Tip 3

8 6 Ring

7 5 Tip 4

10 12 Ring

9 11 Tip 5

12 10 Ring

11 9 Tip 6

14 16 Ring

13 15 Tip 7

16 14 Ring

15 13 Tip 8


19 21 Ring

20 22 Tip 1

21 19 Ring

22 20 Tip 2

23 25 Ring

24 26 Tip 3

25 23 Ring

26 24 Tip 4

27 29 Ring 5



4-43


28 30 Tip

29 27 Ring

30 28 Tip 6

31 33 Ring

32 34 Tip 7

33 31 Ring

34 32 Tip 8


54 56 Ring

53 55 Tip 1

56 54 Ring

55 53 Tip 2

58 60 Ring

57 59 Tip 3

60 58 Ring

59 57 Tip 4

62 64 Ring

61 63 Tip 5

64 62 Ring

63 61 Tip 6

66 68 Ring

65 67 Tip 7

68 66 Ring

67 65 Tip 8


I. Outline




4-44

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Main label

Twisted pair


X1 X2



II. Pin assignment



Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

35 37

36 38 Twisted

37 35

38 36 Twisted

39 41

40 42 Twisted

41 39

42 40 Twisted

43 45

44 46 Twisted

45 43

46 44 Twisted

47 49

48 50 Twisted

49 47

50 48 Twisted

2 4

1 3 Twisted

4 2 Twisted



4-45


3 1

6 8

5 7 Twisted

8 6

7 5 Twisted

10 12

9 11 Twisted

12 10

11 9 Twisted

14 16

13 15 Twisted

16 14

15 13 Twisted


19 21

20 22 Twisted

21 19

22 20 Twisted

23 25

24 26 Twisted

25 23

26 24 Twisted

27 29

28 30 Twisted

29 27

30 28 Twisted

31 33

32 34 Twisted

33 31

34 32 Twisted

54 56 Twisted



4-46


53 55

56 54

55 53 Twisted

58 60

57 59 Twisted

60 58

59 57 Twisted

62 64

61 63 Twisted

64 62

63 61 Twisted

66 68

65 67 Twisted

68 66

67 65 Twisted

4.2.24 Overview of Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF

The trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF has two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each type provides 16 E1 channels.

PVU8/RSU8 can provide eight E1 ports. The PVU8/RSU8 in the left half of the frame (front view of the frame) uses the 1st–8th E1 channels of the trunk cable, and the PVU8/RSU8 in the right half uses the 9th–16th E1 channels.

PVU4/RSU4 can provide four E1 ports. The PVU4/RSU4 in the left half of the frame (front view of the frame) uses the first four E1 channels of the trunk cable, and the PVU8/RSU8 in the right half uses the 9th–12th E1 channels.

4.2.25 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF

This trunk cable is the same as the trunk cable from APMB to DDF.

4.2.26 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000

The trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 has four types, each of which provides 16 E1 channels.



4-47

75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2

PVU8/RSU8 can provide eight E1 ports. The PVU8/RSU8 in the left half of the frame (front view of the frame) uses the 1st–8th E1 channels of the trunk cable, and the PVU8/RSU8 in the right half uses the 9th–16th E1 channels.

PVU4/RSU4 can provide four E1 ports. The PVU4/RSU4 in the left half of the frame (front view of the frame) uses the 1st–4th E1 channels of the trunk cable, and the PVU4/RSU4 in the right half uses the 9th–12th E1 channels.


75 ohms and 120 ohms are the matching impedance of the E1 transmission terminal. In general, for the 75-ohm matching impedance matching impedance, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable). For the 120-ohm matching impedance matching impedance, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric cable pair). To select the matching impedance, ensure that the DIP switch of the card and the Metro 1000 is set correctly and the data is consistent.

4.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000

The E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 is the same as the trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000.

4.3 Subtending Cable

4.3.1 Overview of Subtending Cable

The subtending cables include:

HW cable LVDS cable of the slave frame LVDS cable of the extended frame

4.3.2 HW Cable

I. Outline

Figure 4–18 shows the outline of the HW cable.

X1 X2

D-type connector(28-pin, male) Twisted pairPos.28

Pos.14

Pos.13

Pos.1


Figure 4–18 Outline of the HW cable



4-48

II. Pin assignment

Table 4–38 shows the pin assignment of the HW cable.

Table 4–38 Pin assignment of the HW cable


3 3

4 4 Twisted

5 5

6 6 Twisted

7 7

8 8 Twisted

9 9

10 10 Twisted

11 11

12 12 Twisted

13 13

14 14 Twisted

15 15

16 16 Twisted

17 17

18 18 Twisted

19 19

20 20 Twisted

21 21

22 22 Twisted

23 23

24 24 Twisted

25 25

26 26 Twisted

27 27

28 28 Twisted



4-49

4.3.3 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame

I. Outline

Figure 4–19 shows the outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame.

X1 X2

Label


Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Twisted pair

Figure 4–19 Outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame.

II. Pin assignment

Table 4–39 lists the pin assignment of the LVDS cable for the slave frame.

Table 4–39 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for slave frame


3 3

1 1

2 2

Twisted

4 4

5 6

6 5

Twisted

9 9

7 37

8 38

Twisted

10 10

11 11

12 12

Twisted

15 15

13 13

14 14

Twisted

18 18

19 49

Twisted



4-50


20 50

24 24

25 25

26 26

Twisted

30 30

31 61

32 62

Twisted

36 36

37 7

38 8

Twisted

42 42

43 43

44 44

Twisted

48 48

49 19

50 20

Twisted

53 53

51 51

52 52

Twisted

54 54

55 55

56 56

Twisted

60 60

61 31

62 32

Twisted

66 66

67 67

68 68

Twisted



4-51

4.3.4 LVDS Cable for the Extended Frame

I. Outline

Table 4–20 shows the outline of the LVDS cable for the extended frame.

X1 X2

Label


Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Twisted pair

Figure 4–20 Outline of the LVDS cable for the extended frame.

II. Pin assignment

Table 4–40 lists the pin assignment of the LVDS cable for the extended frame.

Table 4–40 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for extended frame


1 1

2 2

3 3

Twisted

4 4

5 5

6 6

Twisted

7 7

8 8

9 9

Twisted

10 10

11 11

12 12

Twisted

13 13

14 14

15 15

Twisted

17 17

18 18

Twisted



4-52


19 19

20 20

21 21

22 22

Twisted

23 23

24 24

25 25

Twisted

26 26

27 27

28 28

Twisted

29 29

30 30

31 31

Twisted

37 37

35 35

36 36

Twisted

40 40

38 38

39 39

Twisted

43 43

41 41

42 42

Twisted

46 46

44 44

45 45

Twisted

49 49

47 47

48 48

Twisted

53 53

51 51

52 52

Twisted

56 56 Twisted



4-53


54 54

55 55

59 59

57 57

58 58

Twisted

62 62

60 60

61 61

Twisted

65 65

63 63

64 64

Twisted

66 66

67 67

68 68

Twisted

16 16

50 50 Twisted

33 33

32 32 Twisted

4.4 Subscriber Cable

4.4.1 Overview of Subscriber Cable

The front-access subscriber cable includes:

16-channel unshielded subscriber cable 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable ATIA subscriber cable EAUA subscriber cable

4.4.2 16-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable

I. Relative cards

The 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable is suitable for the following cards:

Narrowband line card: ASL, DSL, VFB and CDI Broadband line card: SDLB



4-54

Narrowband and broadband combo line card: CSMB, CSMC, CSLB and CSLI

The ports of the cable used by line cards are shown in the following figures.

Note:

One pane in the following two figures indicates one subscriber port. When the pane is filled, the line card uses this port. When it is not filled, the line card does not use this port.

ASL, VFB, CDI, SDLB, CSMB, CSMC, CSLB and CSLI

0 15

DSL

0 7

II. Outline

Figure 4–21 shows the outline of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable.

X1

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Main label


Twisted pair

Figure 4–21 Outline of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable

III. Pin assignment

Table 4–41 shows the pin assignment of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable.

Table 4–41 Pin assignment of the 16-channel unshielded subscriber cable

Connector X1 Tip color and relationship Port No.

36 Blue

35 White Twisted 0

38 Orange

37 White Twisted 1



4-55

Connector X1 Tip color and relationship Port No.

40 Green

39 White Twisted 2

42 Brown

41 White Twisted 3

44 Gray

43 White Twisted 4

46 Blue

45 Red Twisted 5

48 Orange

47 Red Twisted 6

50 Green

49 Red Twisted 7

20 Brown

19 Red Twisted 8

22 Gray

21 Red Twisted 9

24 Blue

23 Black Twisted 10

26 Orange

25 Black Twisted 11

28 Green

27 Black Twisted 12

30 Brown

29 Black Twisted 13

32 Gray

31 Black Twisted 14

34 Blue

33 Yellow Twisted 15



4-56

4.4.3 32-channel Unshielded Subscriber Cable

I. Relative cards

The 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable is suitable for the following cards:

Narrowband line card: ASL, DSL, VFB and CDI Broadband line card: SDLB, ADLB, ADLF, ADMB, ADMC, ADMI, VDLA and

VDLB Narrowband and broadband combo line card: CSMB, CSMC, CSLB and CSLI

The ports of the cable used by line cards are shown as follows.

Note:

One pane in the following two figures indicates one subscriber port. When the pane is filled, the line card uses this port. When it is not filled, the line card does not use this port.

32-port analog line card

31

0

16

15

16-port analog line card, VFB, CDI, SDLB, CSMB, CSMC, CSLB and CSLI

0 7

158 ADLB, ADLF, ADMB, ADMC, ADMI, VDLA and VDLB

0-15 POTS

0-15 LINE

DSL

0 7

II. Outline

Figure 4–22 shows the outline of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable.



4-57

X1

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Main label


Twisted pair

Figure 4–22 Outline of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable

III. Pin assignment

Table 4–42 shows the pin assignment of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable.

Table 4–42 Pin assignment of the 32-channel unshielded subscriber cable

Connector X1 Cable binder color Tip color & relationship Port No.

36 White

35 Blue Twisted 0

38 White

37 Orange Twisted 1

40 White

39 Green Twisted 2

42 White

41 Brown Twisted 3

44 White

43 Gray Twisted 4

46 Red

45 Blue Twisted 5

48 Red

47 Orange Twisted 6

50 Red

49

Blue

Green Twisted 7

2 Red

1 Brown Twisted 8

4 Red

3

Blue

Gray Twisted 9



4-58


6 Black

5 Blue Twisted 10

8 Black

7 Orange Twisted 11

10 Black

9 Green Twisted 12

12 Black

11 Brown Twisted 13

14 Black

13 Gray Twisted 14

16 Yellow

15

Blue Twisted 15

54 White

53 Blue Twisted 16

56 White

55 Orange Twisted 17

58 White

57 Green Twisted 18

60 White

59 Brown Twisted 19

62 White

61 Gray Twisted 20

64 Red

63 Blue Twisted 21

66 Red


68 Red

67

Orange

Green Twisted 23

20 Red

19 Brown Twisted 24

22

Orange

Red Twisted 25



4-59


21 Gray

24 Black

23 Blue Twisted 26

26 Black


28 Black

27 Green Twisted 28

30 Black

29 Brown Twisted 29

32 Black

31 Gray Twisted 30

34 Yellow

33

Blue Twisted 31

4.4.4 ATIA Subscriber Cable

I. Relative cards

The ATIA subscriber cable is used on the ATIA card.

II. Outline

Figure 4–23 shows the outline of the ATIA subscriber cable.

X1

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Main label


Twisted pair

Figure 4–23 Outline of the ATIA subscriber cable

III. Pin assignment

Table 4–43 shows the pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable.



4-60

Table 4–43 Pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable

Connector X1 Tip color & tip definition Port No.

36 White Line A

38 Blue Line B

40 White Line C

42 Orange Line D

44 White Line E1

46 Green Line E2

48 White Line M1

50 Brown Line M2

1


2 White Line A

1 Gray Line B

4 Red Line C

3 Blue Line D

6 Red Line E1

5 Orange Line E2

8 Red Line M1

7 Green Line M2

2


35 Red Line A

37 Brown Line B

39 Red Line C

41 Gray Line D

43 Black Line E1

45 Blue Line E2

47 Black Line M1

49 Orange Line M2

3



4-61


20 Black Line A

22 Green Line B

24 Black Line C

26 Brown Line D

28 Black Line E1

30 Gray Line E2

32 Yellow Line M1

34 Blue Line M2

4


62 Yellow Line A

61 Orange Line B

64 Yellow Line C

63 Green Line D

66 Yellow Line E1

65 Brown Line E2

68 Yellow Line M1

67 Gray Line M2

5


19 Purple Line A

21 Blue Line B

23 Purple Line C

25 Orange Line D

27 Purple Line E1

29 Green Line E2

31 Purple Line M1

33 Brown Line M2

6



4-62

4.4.5 EAUA Subscriber Cable

I. Relative cards

The EAUA subscriber cable is suitable for the EAUA card.

II. Outline

Figure 4–24 shows the outline of the EAUA subscriber cable.

X7

Network portconnector

X2 X

8 1

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

X5Main label


X3X1

X4X6X8

Twisted pair

Label

Figure 4–24 Outline of the EAUA subscriber cable

Table 4–44 describes the labels on the subscriber cable.

Table 4–44 Labels on the EAUA subscriber cable


Channel1 X1 The 1st channel of signal

Channel2 X2 The 2nd channel of signal

Channel3 X3 The 3rd channel of signal

Channel4 X4 The 4th channel of signal





III. Pin assignment

Table 4–45 shows the pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable.

Table 4–45 Pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable

Connector X Connector X1 Tip color & relationship Port No.

36 1 White

35 2 Black Twisted

0



4-63


38 3 White

37 6 Brown Twisted


40 1 White

39 2 Black Twisted

42 3 White

41 6 Brown Twisted

1


44 1 White

43 2 Black Twisted

46 3 White

45 6 Brown Twisted

2


48 1 White

47 2 Black Twisted

50 3 White

49 6 Brown Twisted

3


20 1 White

19 2 Black Twisted

22 3 White

21 6 Brown Twisted

4


24 1 White

23 2 Black Twisted

26 3 White Twisted

5



4-64


25 6 Brown


28 1 White

27 2 Black Twisted

30 3 White

29 6 Brown Twisted

6


32 1 White

31 2 Black Twisted

34 3 White

33 6 Brown Twisted

7

4.5 Maintenance Cable

4.5.1 Overview of Maintenance Cable

The front-access maintenance cables of the UA5000 include:

Local maintenance serial port cable Network cable

4.5.2 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable

I. Overview

The local maintenance serial port cable is used for debugging or remote maintenance.

One end of the cable is a 8-pin network connector, connected to the card. The other end is a DB-9 or DB-25 female connector. When the cable is to connect with a PC, use the DB-9 female connector.

II. Pin assignment

Figure 4–25 shows the outline of the maintenance cable.



4-65

D-type connector(25-pin, female)

LabelNetwork port connector

(8-pin, RJ-45)

18

D-type connector(9-pin, female)

X1

X2

X3

POS.1POS.14

POS.25 POS.13

Pos.1 Pos.6

Pos.5 Pos.9

Figure 4–25 Outline of the local maintenance cable

Table 4–46 shows its pin assignment.

Table 4–46 Pin assignment of the maintenance cable

Connector Match-up

X2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

X1 5 6 3 1 7 2 20 4

X3 8 6 2 5 5 3 4 7

4.5.3 Overview of Network Cable

There are two types of network cables: straight through cable and cross over cable.

The straight through cable is used to connect the data terminal equipment (DTE) with the network.

The cross over cable is used to directly connect two maintenance terminals.

RJ-45 connectors are used to connect Ethernet ports. They can be connected with Category-3 and Category-5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs (UTP-3 and UTP-5) or Shielded Twisted Pair (STP).

For the Category-5 UTP, the maximum transmission distance of single segment without repeater is 100 m. When repeaters are used, the maximum space between repeaters is 5 m. Due to the delay and signal timing, a maximum of two repeaters can be used. Therefore, the maximum distance between two sites is 205 m.

To get the best electrical transmission characteristics, make sure that 1 and 2, 3 and 6 are just two cable cores of the twisted pair.



4-66

4.5.4 Straight Through Cable

I. Outline

Figure 4–26 shows the outline of the straight through cable.

X1 X21

8

1

8

Figure 4–26 Outline of the straight through cable

II. Pin assignment

Table 4–47 shows the pin assignment of the straight through cable.

Table 4–47 Pin assignment of the straight through cable

Connector X1 Tip color Connector X2

1 White and orange 1

2 Orange 2

3 White and green 3

4 Blue 4

5 White and blue 5

6 Green 6

7 White and brown 7

8 Brown 8

4.5.5 Cross Over Cable

I. Outline

Figure 4–27 shows the outline of the cross over cable.

X1 X21

8

1

8

Figure 4–27 Outline of the cross over cable



4-67

Table 4–48 shows the pin assignment of the cross over cable.

Table 4–48 Pin assignment of the cross over cable

Connector X1 Tip color Connector X2

1 White and orange 3

2 Orange 6

3 White and green 1

4 Blue 4

5 White and blue 5

6 Green 2

7 White and brown 7

8 Brown 8

4.6 Signal Cable The front-access signal cables of the UA5000 include:

Test and alarm cable Test and alarm subtending cable

4.6.1 Test and Alarm Cable

I. Outline

Figure 4–28 shows the outline of the test and alarm cable.


Label

Main label

X1

X2

X6

X5

X4

X7

X3

8-pin networkport connector

T2500J terminal4-pin connector

Pos.28

Pos.14

Pos.13

Pos.1

1

8

8 1

41

Figure 4–28 Outline of the test and alarm cable



4-68

Note:

X1 and X2 are used for inter-frame subtending. X3–X7 are used to connect with monitoring ports in the environment monitoring

unit.

Table 4–49 lists the label prints on the test and alarm cable.

Table 4–49 Label prints on the test and alarm cable


HWTF STACK IN X2 Connecting with the HWTF card.

ESC0 X4

ESC1 X3

N-RS485 X5

B-RS485 X6

FAN ALARM X7

Connecting with the environment monitoring unit.

II. Pin assignment

Table 4–50 shows the pin assignment of the test and alarm cable.

Table 4–50 Pin assignment of the test and alarm cable


1 1

2 2 Twisted

3 3

4 4 Twisted

5 5

6 6 Twisted

15 15

16 16 Twisted

17 17

18 18 Twisted



4-69


23 7

9 3 Twisted

7 6 -


24 7

10 3 Twisted

8 6 -


25 1

26 2 Twisted

27 4

28 5 Twisted


11 1

12 2 Twisted

13 4

14 5 Twisted


20 2

19 3 Twisted

4.6.2 Test and Alarm Subtending Cable

I. Outline

Figure 4–29 shows the outline of the test and alarm subtending cable.



4-70

D-type connector(28-pin, male) LabelMain label

4-pin connector

X1

X2

X3

Pos.28

Pos.1

Pos.14

Pos.13 1

4

Figure 4–29 Outline of the test and alarm subtending cable

Note:

X1 and X2 are used for inter-frame subtending. X3 is used to connect with the corresponding monitoring port in the environment

monitor unit.

Table 4–51 lists the label prints on the test and alarm subtending cable.

Table 4–51 Label prints on the test and alarm subtending cable


HWTF STACK OUT X2 Connecting with the HWTF card.

FAN ALARM X3 Connecting with the environment monitoring unit.

II. Pin assignment

Table 4–52 lists the pin assignment of the test and alarm subtending cable.

Table 4–52 Pin assignment of the test and alarm subtending cable


1 1

2 2 Twisted

3 3

4 4 Twisted

5 5

6 6 Twisted



4-71


15 15

16 16 Twisted

17 17

18 18 Twisted


20 2

19 3 Twisted

4.7 Optical Fiber The APMB/IPMB/AIUB card can provide different optical ports through the different optical subcards. In this way, the UA5000 can connect with the upstream and downstream equipment through optical fibers.

4.7.1 Optical Fiber Type

Optical fibers fall into two types: single-mode optical fibers and multi-mode optical fibers, which have different transmission distances.

Table 4–53 lists the optical fibers used by the cards of the UA5000, as well as their transmission distances.

Table 4–53 Optical fibers used by the cards of the UA5000

Subcard Description Transmission distance Card

H601V2HAF 2-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, single-mode 15 km APMB

H601V2HAG 2-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, single-mode 40 km APMB

H602V1HAF

1-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, single-mode 1-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, multi-mode

15 km 2 km

APMB

H602V2HAG 2-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, single-mode 40 km APMB



4-72


H602V1HAF


15 km 2 km

APMB

H602V1HAG


40 km 2 km

APMB

H602V1HTF 1-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, single-mode 15 km APMB

H602V1HTG 1-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, single-mode 40 km APMB

H602V2HCF 2-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, single-mode 15 km APMB

H602V2HCG 2-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, single-mode 40 km APMB

H602V1HCF


15 km 2 km

APMB

H602V1HCG


40 km 2 km

APMB

H602V1HEF 1-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, single-mode 15 km APMB

H602V1HEG 1-port 622 M VP Ring optical port subcard, single-mode 40 km APMB

H601O1CNH 1-port 155 M ATM optical port subcard, single-mode 60 km APMB

H601O2CNH 2-port 155 M ATM optical port subcard, single-mode 60 km APMB

H601O2CNG 2-port 155 M ATM optical port subcard, single-mode 30 km APMB

H601O2CNB 2-port 155 M ATM optical port subcard, multi-mode 2 km APMB

H601O2FNF 2-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical port subcard, single-mode

15 km IPMB

H601O2FNB 2-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical port subcard, multi-mode

2 km IPMB



4-73


H601O1FNF 1-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical port subcard, single-mode

15 km IPMB

H601O1FNB 1-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical port subcard, multi-mode

2 km IPMB

H601O2GNA 2-port GE Ethernet optical port subcard, multi-mode 500 m IPMB

H601O2GNE 2-port GE Ethernet optical port subcard, single-mode 10 km IPMB

H601O2GNG 2-port GE Ethernet optical port subcard, single-mode 40 km IPMB

H601O1GNE 1-port GE Ethernet optical port subcard, single-mode 10 km IPMB

H601O1GNA 1-port GE Ethernet optical port subcard, multi-mode 500 m IPMB

H601O1GNG 1-port GE Ethernet optical port subcard, single-mode 40 km IPMB

H601O1CNG 1-port 155 M ATM optical port subcard, single-mode 30 km AIUB

H601O1CNB 1-port 155 M ATM optical port subcard, multi-mode 2 km AIUB

H601O2CNG 2-port 155 M ATM optical port subcard, single-mode 30 km AIUB

H601O2CNB 2-port 155 M ATM optical port subcard, multi-mode 2 km AIUB

4.7.2 Fiber Selection Criteria

1) Length

It depends on the specific survey result.

2) Single-mode/Multi-mode

It depends on the types of optical port subcards.

3) Optical port type

SC/PC optical port adopts a square connector and FC/PC optical port adopts a round connector. According to the shapes of the optical ports of the equipment connected to both ends of the fiber, there are three combinations:

Square connectors at both ends: SC/PC–SC/PC



4-74

Round connectors at both ends: FC/PC–FC/PC Square connector at one end and round connector at the other end:

FC/PC–SC/PC

4.7.3 Optical Port Connector

The common optical connectors include LC/SC/PC, ST/PC, FC/PC, MTRJ and LC connectors, as shown in Table 4–54.

Table 4–54 Common optical connectors

SC/PC optical connector

ST/PC optical connector

FC/PC optical connector

MTRJ optical connector

LC/PC optical connector

-

The UA5000 uses SC/PC and MTRJ/PC optical connectors. According to different opposite equipment, four types of optical patchcords can be selected, which are SC/PC-FC/PC, SC/PC-SC/PC, MTRJ-SC/PC and MTRJ-FC/PC.

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear-Access Cables


5-1

Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear-Access Cables

5.1 About This Chapter The rear-access cables of the UA5000 include:

Trunk cable Subtending cable Subscriber cable Maintenance cable Signal cable

5.2 Trunk Cable

5.2.1 Overview of Trunk Cable

The UA5000 uses the following types of rear-access trunk cables:

E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 Subtending cable of IPMB Upstream cable of IPMB E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 100


The E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF has two types: 75-ohm E1 trunk cable and 120-ohm E1 trunk cable. Each E1 trunk cable provides 16 E1 channels.

When the APMB card holds the H601CESA or H601E8IA subboard, the APMB card can provide eight E1 ports. The APMB in the left half of the service frame (front view) uses the first eight E1 ports, and the APMB in the right half uses the last eight E1 ports.



5-2


I. Outline

Figure 5–1 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.

Main label


Coaxial cableX1

Label

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35


II. Pin assignment

Table 5–1 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable from APMB to DDF.

Note:

In Table 5–1, "SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on the cable jacket. The meaning of "R/T relationship" is as follows:

R0: receiving of the first channel of E1 signals. T0: transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals.


X1 Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship

34 Tip

33 Ring 1 R0

32 Tip

31 Ring 2 T0

30 Tip

29 Ring 3 R1

28 Tip

27 Ring 4 T1



5-3


26 Tip

25 Ring 5 R2

24 Tip

23 Ring 6 T2

22 Tip

21 Ring 7 R3

20 Tip

19 Ring 8 T3

50 Tip

49 Ring 9 R4

48 Tip

47 Ring 10 T4

46 Tip

45 Ring 11 R5

44 Tip

43 Ring 12 T5

42 Tip

41 Ring 13 R6

40 Tip

39 Ring 14 T6

38 Tip

37 Ring 15 R7

36 Tip

35 Ring 16 T7

68 Ring

67 Tip 1 R8

66 Ring

65 Tip 2 T8

64 Ring

63 Tip 3 R9

62 Ring

61 Tip 4 T9



5-4


60 Ring

59 Tip 5 R10

58 Ring

57 Tip 6 T10

56 Ring

55 Tip 7 R11

54 Ring

53 Tip 8 T11

16 Ring

15 Tip 9 R12

14 Ring

13 Tip 10 T12

12 Ring

11 Tip 11 R13

10 Ring

9 Tip 12 T13

8 Ring

7 Tip 13 R14

6 Ring

5 Tip 14 T14

4 Ring

3 Tip 15 R15

2 Ring

1 Tip 16 T15


I. Outline




5-5

Main label


X1 Twisted pair

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Label


II. Pin assignment

Table 5–2 shows the pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.

Note:

In Table 5–2, the meaning of the "R/T relationship" is as follows: R1: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals. T1: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals.


X1 Tip color and relationship R/T relationship

34 White

33 Blue Twisted R1

32 White


30 White

29 Green Twisted R2

28 White

27 Brown Twisted T2

26 White

25 Gray Twisted R3

24 Red Twisted T3



5-6


23 Blue

22 Red


20 Red

19 Green Twisted T4

50 Red

49 Brown Twisted R5

48 Red

47 Gray Twisted T5

46 Black

45 Blue Twisted R6

44 Black


42 Black

41 Green Twisted R7

40 Black

39 Brown Twisted T7

38 Black

37 Gray Twisted R8

36 Yellow

35 Blue Twisted T8

68 White

67 Blue Twisted R9

66 White


64 White


62 White


60 White

59 Gray Twisted R11

58 Red Twisted T11



5-7


57 Blue

56 Red


54 Red

53 Green Twisted T12

16 Red


14 Red

13 Gray Twisted T13

12 Black

11 Blue Twisted R14

10 Black


8 Black

7 Green Twisted R15

6 Black

5 Brown Twisted T15

4 Black

3 Gray Twisted R16

2 Yellow

1 Blue Twisted T16


The E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF has two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each type provides two E3 channels.


I. Outline




5-8

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

D-type connector(68-pin, male) Main label

Coaxial cable

Label

SMB coaxial connector

X1 X2

X3

X4

X5


Table 5–3 shows the labels on the 75-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.



R0 X2 Receiving of the 1st E3 signals

T0 X3 Transmitting of the 1st E3 signals

R1 X4 Receiving of the 2nd E3 signals

T1 X5 Transmitting of the 2nd E3 signals

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–4 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E3 cable from APMB to DDF.

Note:



X1 Coaxial cable R/T relationship

34 Tip

33 Ring R0

32 Tip

31 Ring T0



5-9

X1 Coaxial cable R/T relationship

30 Tip

29 Ring R1

28 Tip

27 Ring T1


I. Outline


Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

D-type connector(68-pin, male) Main label

Twisted pair

Label

X1


Table 5–5 shows the labels on the 120-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.


Label Meaning

R0 Receiving of the 1st E3 signals

T0 Transmitting of the 1st E3 signals

R1 Receiving of the 2nd E3 signals

T1 Transmitting of the 2nd E3 signals

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–6 shows the pin assignment of the 120-ohm E3 trunk cable from APMB to DDF.



5-10

Note:




34 White

33 Blue Twisted R0

32 White


30 White

29 Green Twisted R1

28 White

27 Brown Twisted T1

5.2.8 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from APMB to Metro 1000

The E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 has four types, each of which provides 16 E1 ports:

75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP2


75-ohm and 120-ohm are the matching impedance of the E1 transmission terminal. In general, for the 75-ohm matching impedance, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable). For the 120-ohm matching impedance, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric cable pair). To select the matching impedance, ensure that the DIP switch of the card and the Metro 1000 is set correctly and the data is consistent.


I. Outline

Figure 5–5 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.



5-11

X1Coaxial cable

1 6

abcd

Main label

Label

X2

X3

X8

X9


Wire connector(4 x 6-pin, female)

Pos.68Pos.34

Pos.35Pos.1


Table 5–7 describes the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.

Table 5–7 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1


|1–2|E1 X2 The 1st–2nd channels of E1 signals

|3–4|E1 X3 The 3rd–4th channels of E1 signals

|5–6|E1 X4 The 5th–6th channels of E1 signals






II. Pin assignment

Table 5–8 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.

Note:

In Table 5–8, "SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on the cable jacket.



5-12


X1 X2 Coaxial cable & SN

34 a6 Tip

33 a5 Ring 1

32 d3 Tip

31 d4 Ring 2

30 a4 Tip

29 a3 Ring 3

28 d1 Tip

27 d2 Ring 4


26 a6 Tip

25 a5 Ring 5

24 d3 Tip

23 d4 Ring 6

22 a4 Tip

21 a3 Ring 7

20 d1 Tip

19 d2 Ring 8


50 a6 Tip

49 a5 Ring 9

48 d3 Tip

47 d4 Ring 10

46 a4 Tip

45 a3 Ring 11

44 d1 Tip

43 d2 Ring 12



5-13


42 a6 Tip

41 a5 Ring 13

40 d3 Tip

39 d4 Ring 14

38 a4 Tip

37 a3 Ring 15

36 d1 Tip

35 d2 Ring 16


68 a5 Ring

67 a6 Tip 1

66 d4 Ring

65 d3 Tip 2

64 a3 Ring

63 a4 Tip 3

62 d2 Ring

61 d1 Tip 4


60 a5 Ring

59 a6 Tip 5

58 d4 Ring

57 d3 Tip 6

56 a3 Ring

55 a4 Tip 7

54 d2 Ring

53 d1 Tip 8


16 a5 Ring 9



5-14


15 a6 Tip

14 d4 Ring

13 d3 Tip 10

12 a3 Ring

11 a4 Tip 11

10 d2 Ring

9 d1 Tip 12


8 a5 Ring

7 a6 Tip 13

6 d4 Ring

5 d3 Tip 14

4 a3 Ring

3 a4 Tip 15

2 d2 Ring

1 d1 Tip 16


I. Outline




5-15

X1Twisted pair

1 6

abcd

Main label

Label

X2

X3

X8

X9



Pos.68Pos.34

Pos.35Pos.1

Figure 5–6 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from APMB to Metro 1000 SS42 SP1




|1–2|E1 X2 The 1st–2nd channels of E1 signals

|3–4|E1 X3 The 3rd–4th channels of E1 signals







II. Pin assignment



X1 X2 Tip color Relationship

34 a6 White

33 a5 Blue Twisted



5-16


32 d3 White

31 d4 Orange Twisted

30 a4 White

29 a3 Green Twisted

28 d1 White

27 d2 Brown Twisted


26 a6 White

25 a5 Gray Twisted

24 d3 Red

23 d4 Blue Twisted

22 a4 Red

21 a3 Orange Twisted

20 d1 Red

19 d2 Green Twisted


50 a6 Red

49 a5 Brown Twisted

48 d3 Red

47 d4 Gray Twisted

46 a4 Black

45 a3 Blue Twisted

44 d1 Black



42 a6 Black

41 a5 Green Twisted

40 d3 Black Twisted



5-17


39 d4 Brown

38 a4 Black

37 a3 Gray Twisted

36 d1 Yellow

35 d2 Blue Twisted


68 a5 White

67 a6 Blue Twisted

66 d4 White


64 a3 White

63 a4 Green Twisted

62 d2 White

61 d1 Brown Twisted


60 a5 White

59 a6 Gray Twisted

58 d4 Red

57 d3 Blue Twisted

56 a3 Red

55 a4 Orange Twisted

54 d2 Red

53 d1 Green Twisted


16 a5 Red

15 a6 Brown Twisted

14 d4 Red

13 d3 Gray Twisted



5-18


12 a3 Black

11 a4 Blue Twisted

10 d2 Black

9 d1 Orange Twisted


8 a5 Black

7 a6 Green Twisted

6 d4 Black

5 d3 Brown Twisted

4 a3 Black

3 a4 Gray Twisted

2 d2 Yellow

1 d1 Blue Twisted


I. Outline


X1Coaxial cable

1 6

abcd

Main label

Label

X2

X3

X4

X5



Pos.68Pos.34

Pos.35Pos.1





5-19



|1–4|E1 X2 The 1st–4th channels of E1 signals

|5–8|E1 X3 5th–8th channels of E1 signals



II. Pin assignment


Note:




34 b6 Tip

33 a6 Ring 1

32 c6 Tip

31 d6 Ring 2

30 a5 Tip

29 a4 Ring 3

28 d5 Tip

27 d4 Ring 4

26 a3 Tip

25 a2 Ring 5

24 d3 Tip

23 d2 Ring 6

22 a1 Tip 7



5-20


21 b1 Ring

20 d1 Tip

19 c1 Ring 8


50 b6 Tip

49 a6 Ring 9

48 c6 Tip

47 d6 Ring 10

46 a5 Tip

45 a4 Ring 11

44 d5 Tip

43 d4 Ring 12

42 a3 Tip

41 a2 Ring 13

40 d3 Tip

39 d2 Ring 14

38 a1 Tip

37 b1 Ring 15

36 d1 Tip

35 c1 Ring 16


68 a6 Ring

67 b6 Tip 1

66 d6 Ring

65 c6 Tip 2

64 a4 Ring

63 a5 Tip 3

62 d4 Ring

61 d5 Tip 4



5-21


60 a2 Ring

59 a3 Tip 5

58 d2 Ring

57 d3 Tip 6

56 b1 Ring

55 a1 Tip 7

54 c1 Ring

53 d1 Tip 8


16 a6 Ring

15 b6 Tip 9

14 d6 Ring

13 c6 Tip 10

12 a4 Ring

11 a5 Tip 11

10 d4 Ring

9 d5 Tip 12

8 a2 Ring

7 a3 Tip 13

6 d2 Ring

5 d3 Tip 14

4 b1 Ring

3 a1 Tip 15

2 c1 Ring

1 d1 Tip 16


I. Outline




5-22

X1Twisted pair

1 6

abcd

Main label

Label

X2

X3

X4

X5


Wire connector (4 x 60-pin, female)

Pos.68Pos.34

Pos.35Pos.1





|1–4|E1 X2 The 1st–4th channels of E1 signals




II. Pin assignment



X1 Tip color X2 Relationship

34 White b6

33 Blue a6 Twisted

32 White c6

31 Orange d6 Twisted

30 White a5

29 Green a4 Twisted



5-23


28 White d5

27 Brown d4 Twisted

26 White a3

25 Gray a2 Twisted

24 Red d3

23 Blue d2 Twisted

22 Red a1

21 Orange b1 Twisted

20 Red d1

19 Green c1 Twisted


50 Red b6

49 Brown a6 Twisted

48 Red c6

47 Gray d6 Twisted

46 black a5

45 Blue a4 Twisted

44 black d5

43 Orange d4 Twisted

42 black a3

41 Green a2 Twisted

40 black d3

39 Brown d2 Twisted

38 black a1

37 Gray b1 Twisted

36 Yellow d1

35 Blue c1 Twisted


68 White a6 Twisted



5-24


67 Blue b6

66 White d6

65 Orange c6 Twisted

64 White a4

63 Green a5 Twisted

62 White d4

61 Brown d5 Twisted

60 White a2

59 Gray a3 Twisted

58 Red d2

57 Blue d3 Twisted

56 Red b1

55 Orange a1 Twisted

54 Red c1

53 Green d1 Twisted


16 Red a6

15 Brown b6 Twisted

14 Red d6

13 Gray c6 Twisted

12 black a4

11 Blue a5 Twisted

10 black d4

9 Orange d5 Twisted

8 black a2

7 Green a3 Twisted

6 black d2

5 Brown d3 Twisted

4 black b1

3 Gray a1 Twisted

2 Yellow c1 Twisted



5-25


1 Blue d1

5.2.13 E1 Trunk Cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

The E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF has two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each type of the cable provides eight E1 channels.


I. Outline

Figure 5–9 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.


LabelMain label

Pos.44

Pos.1 Pos.15

Pos.30Pos.15

Pos.31

Coaxial cable

Figure 5–9 Outline of the 75-ohm trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

Figure 5–15describes the labels on the E1 trunk cable.

Table 5–15 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

Label Meaning

W1(E1: 1–4) The 1st–4th channels of E1 signals

W2(E1: 5–8) The 5th–8th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–16 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.



5-26

Note:

In Table 5–16, "SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on the cable jacket. The meaning of the "R/T relationship" is as follows:

R1: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the AIUB/DEHA/EDTB side. T1: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the AIUB/DEHA/EDTB side.


X Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship

38 Ring

23 Tip 1 R1

37 Ring

22 Tip 3 R2

36 Ring

21 Tip 5 R3

35 Ring

20 Tip 7 R4

15 Ring

30 Tip 2 T1

14 Ring

29 Tip 4 T2

13 Ring

28 Tip 6 T3

12 Ring

27 Tip 8 T4

34 Ring

19 Tip 1 R5

33 Ring

18 Tip 3 R6

32 Ring

17 Tip 5 R7

31 Ring 7 R8



5-27

X Coaxial cable & SN R/T relationship

16 Tip

11 Ring

26 Tip 2 T5

10 Ring

25 Tip 4 T6

9 Ring

24 Tip 6 T7

8 Ring

7 Tip 8 T8


I. Outline

Figure 5–10 shows the outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.

LabelMain label Twisted pair

Pos.44

Pos.1 Pos.15

Pos.30Pos.15

Pos.31



Figure 5–10 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

Table 5–17 describes the labels on the E1 trunk cable.

Table 5–17 Description of the labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF

Label Meaning

W1(Tx 1–8) Transmitting of the 1st–8th channels of E1 signals

W2(Rx 1–8) Receiving of the 1st–8th channels of E1 signals



5-28

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–18 shows the pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.

Note:

In Table 5–18, the meaning of the "R/T relationship" is as follows: R1: Receiving of the first channel of E1 signals at the AIUB/DEHA/EDTB side. T1: Transmitting of the first channel of E1 signals at the AIUB/DEHA/EDTB side.


X Cable color Relationship R/T relationship

15 Blue

30 White Twisted T1

14 Orange

29 White Twisted T2

13 Green

28 White Twisted T3

12 Brown

27 White Twisted T4

11 Gray

26 White Twisted T5

10 Blue

25 Red Twisted T6

9 Orange

24 Red Twisted T7

8 Green

7 Red Twisted T8

38 Blue

23 White Twisted R1

37 Orange

22 White Twisted R2



5-29

X Cable color Relationship R/T relationship

36 Green

21 White Twisted R3

35 Brown

20 White Twisted R4

34 Gray

19 White Twisted R5

33 Blue

18 Red Twisted R6

32 Orange

17 Red Twisted R7

31 Green

16 Red Twisted R8

5.2.16 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF

The rear-access E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF is the same as the front-access E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF.

Refer to "4.2.17 Overview of E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF".

5.2.17 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000

The E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro1000 has four types, as follows:

75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP2

Each type of the E1 trunk cable provides four E1 channels and four SHDSL channels.



The E1 branch of the E1 trunk cable connects to the Metro 1000, and the SHDSL branch connects to the MDF.



5-30

5.2.18 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1

I. Outline

Figure 5–11 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.



Label

X1Main label

X2

X

1 6

abcd

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35Twisted pair

Coaxial cable

Label

Figure 5–11 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1


Table 5–19 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1


1–2E1 X1 The 1st–2nd channels of E1 signals

3–4E1 X2 The 3rd–4th channels of E1 signals

H521SDL Channel0 N/A The 1st channel of SHDSL signal

H521SDL Channel1 N/A The 2nd channel of SHDSL signal

H521SDL Channel2 N/A The 3rd channel of SHDSL signal

H521SDL Channel3 N/A The 4th channel of SHDSL signal

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–20 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.



5-31

Note:

"SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on the cable jacket. "*" after the color in the column "cable color" is the symbol on the cable.

Table 5–20 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1

X Cable color Relationship

28 Pink Red *

27 Pink Black * Twisted

30 Brown Red *

29 Brown Black * Twisted

32 Green Red *

31 Green Black * Twisted

34 Blue Red *

33 Blue Black * Twisted

X Coaxial cable & SN X1

36 Tip a6

35 Ring 1

a5

38 Tip d3

37 Ring 2

d4

40 Tip a4

39 Ring 3

a3

42 Tip d1

41 Ring 4

d2


44 Tip a6

43 Ring 5

a5

46 Tip d3

45 Ring 6

d4

48 Tip 7 a4



5-32


47 Ring a3

50 Tip d1

49 Ring 8

d2


I. Outline

Figure 5–12shows the outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.



Label

X1Main label

X2

X

1 6

abcd

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35Twisted pair

Coaxial cable

Label













5-33

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–22 shows the outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from H521SDL to Metro 1000 SS42SP1.

Note:

In Table 5–22, "SN" in "Tip color and SN " refers to the label print on the cable jacket. "*" after the color in the column "cable color" is the symbol on the cable.



28 Pink Red *


30 Brown Red *


32 Green Red *


34 Blue Red *


X Tip color and SN X1

36 White a6

35 Blue 1

a5

38 White d3

37 Orange 2

d4

40 White a4

39 Green 3

a3

42 White d1

41 Brown 4

d2


44 White 5 a6



5-34


43 Gray a5

46 Red d3

45 Blue 6

d4

48 Red a4

47 Orange 7

a3

50 Red d1

49 Green 8

d2


I. Outline




Label

X1Main label

X

1 6

abcd

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35Twisted pair

Coaxial cable

Label





1–4E1 X1 The 1st–4th channels of E1 signals





5-35



II. Pin assignment


Note:

In Table 5–24, "SN" in "Coaxial cable & SN" refers to the label print on the cable jacket. "*" after the color in the column "Cable color" is the symbol on the cable.



28 Pink Red *


30 Brown Red *


32 Green Red *


34 Blue Red *



36 Tip b6

35 Ring 1

a6

38 Tip c6

37 Ring 2

d6

40 Tip a5

39 Ring 3

a4

42 Tip 4 d5



5-36


41 Ring d4

44 Tip a3

43 Ring 5

a2

46 Tip d3

45 Ring 6

d2

48 Tip a1

47 Ring 7

b1

50 Tip d1

49 Ring 8

c1


I. Outline




Label

X1Main label

X

1 6

abcd

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35Twisted pair

Coaxial cable

Label








5-37






II. Pin assignment


Note:

In Table 5–26, "SN" in "Tip color and No." refers to the label print on the cable jacket. "*" after the color in the column "Cable color" is the symbol on the cable.



28 Pink Red *


30 Brown Red *


32 Green Red *


34 Blue Red *



36 White b6

35 Blue 1

a6

38 White c6

37 Orange 2

d6

40 White 3 a5



5-38


39 Green a4

42 White d5

41 Brown 4

d4

44 White a3

43 Gray 5

a2

46 Red d3

45 Blue 6

d2

48 Red a1

47 Orange 7

b1

50 Red d1

49 Green 8

c1

5.2.22 IPMB Service Subtending Cable

I. Outline

Table 5–15 shows the outline of the IPMB service subtending cable.

Pos.68Pos.34

Pos.35Pos.1


Main label

X

X1

X8

LabelNetwork port connector

(8-pin, female)

1

8

Figure 5–15 Outline of the IPMB service subtending cable

Table 5–27 describes the labels on the cable.

Table 5–27 Description of the labels on the IPMB service subtending cable

Label Meaning

LEFT 1# FE The 1st channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the left of the frame (Front view of the frame)



5-39

Label Meaning

LEFT 2# FE The 2nd channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the left of the frame (Front view of the frame)

LEFT 3# FE The 3rd channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the left of the frame (Front view of the frame)

LEFT 4# FE The 4th channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the left of the frame (Front view of the frame)

RIGHT 1# FE The 1st channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the right of the frame (Front view of the frame)

RIGHT 2# FE The 2nd channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the right of the frame (Front view of the frame)

RIGHT 3# FE The 3rd channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the right of the frame (Front view of the frame)

RIGHT 4# FE The 4th channel of FE signals of the IPMB at the right of the frame (Front view of the frame)

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–28 shows the pin assignment of the IPMB service subtending cable.

Table 5–28 Pin assignment of the IPMB service subtending cable

X X1 Relationship

22 3

21 6 Twisted

20 1

19 2 Twisted

X X2 Relationship

26 3

25 6 Twisted

24 1

23 2 Twisted

X X3 Relationship

31 3

29 6 Twisted

28 1 Twisted



5-40

27 2

X X4 Relationship

34 3

33 6 Twisted

32 1

31 2 Twisted

X X5 Relationship

56 6

55 3 Twisted

54 2

53 1 Twisted

X X6 Relationship

60 6

59 3 Twisted

58 2

57 1 Twisted

X X7 Relationship

64 6

63 3 Twisted

62 2

61 1 Twisted

X X8 Relationship

68 6

67 3 Twisted

66 2

65 1 Twisted



5-41

5.2.23 IPMB Upstream Cable

The upstream cable of the IPMB card adopts a straight through cable.

5.2.24 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB

The E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB has two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each type provides eight E1 channels.


I. Outline

Table 5–16 shows the outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.

X3

D-type connector(68-pin, Male)


LabelX1

X2

Main label Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35Coaxial cable

Pos.44

Pos.1 Pos.15Pos.30Pos.16

Pos.31



Table 5–29 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB

Content Meaning

(1–8)E1 The 1st–8th channels of E1 signals

(9–16)E1 The 9th–16th channels of E1 signals

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–30 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.



5-42

Note:




26 51 Tip

11 49 Ring 1

19 48 Tip

34 47 Ring 2

25 46 Tip

10 45 Ring 3

18 44 Tip

33 43 Ring 4

24 52 Tip

9 41 Ring 5

17 41 Tip

32 39 Ring 6

7 38 Tip

8 37 Ring 7

16 36 Tip

31 35 Ring 8

30 34 Tip

15 33 Ring 1

23 32 Tip

38 31 Ring 2

29 30 Tip

14 29 Ring 3

22 28 Tip

37 27 Ring 4

28 26 Tip 5



5-43


13 25 Ring

21 24 Tip

36 23 Ring 6

27 22 Tip

12 21 Ring 7

20 20 Tip

35 19 Ring 8


15 68 Ring

30 67 Tip 1

38 66 Ring

23 65 Tip 2

14 64 Ring

29 63 Tip 3

37 62 Ring

22 61 Tip 4

13 61 Ring

28 59 Tip 5

36 58 Ring

21 57 Tip 6

12 56 Ring

27 55 Tip 7

35 54 Ring

20 53 Tip 8

11 16 Ring

26 15 Tip 1

34 14 Ring

19 13 Tip 2

10 12 Ring

25 11 Tip 3

33 11 Ring 4



5-44


18 9 Tip

9 8 Ring

24 7 Tip 5

32 6 Ring

17 5 Tip 6

8 4 Ring

7 3 Tip 7

31 2 Ring

16 1 Tip 8


I. Outline

Figure 5–17 shows the outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.

X3



LabelX1

X2

Main label

Pos.44


Pos.31

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35Twisted pair



Table 5–31 Description of the labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB

Content Meaning

(1–8)E1 The 1st–8th channels of E1 signals

(9–16)E1 The 9th–16th channels of E1 signals



5-45

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–32 shows the pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to APMB.


X3 X1 Relationship

50 26

49 11 Twisted

48 19

47 34 Twisted

46 25

45 10 Twisted

44 18

43 33 Twisted

42 24

41 9 Twisted

40 17

39 32 Twisted

38 7

37 8 Twisted

36 16

35 31 Twisted

34 30

33 15 Twisted

32 23

31 38 Twisted

30 29

29 14 Twisted

28 22

27 37 Twisted

26 28

25 13 Twisted

24 21 Twisted



5-46

X3 X1 Relationship

23 36

22 27

21 12 Twisted

20 20

19 35 Twisted

X3 X2 Relationship

68 15

67 30 Twisted

66 38

65 23 Twisted

64 14

63 29 Twisted

62 37

61 22 Twisted

60 13

59 28 Twisted

58 36

57 21 Twisted

56 12

55 27 Twisted

54 35

53 20 Twisted

16 11

15 26 Twisted

14 34

13 19 Twisted

12 10

11 25 Twisted

10 33

9 18 Twisted

8 9 Twisted



5-47

X3 X2 Relationship

7 24

6 32

5 17 Twisted

4 8

3 7 Twisted

2 31

1 16 Twisted

5.2.27 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF

The E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF has two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm. Each type provides eight E1 channels.

The E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to DDF is the same as the E1 trunk cable from AIUB/DEHA/EDTB to DDF.

5.2.28 E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000

The trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 has four types, each of which provides 16 E1 channels.

75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2



5.2.29 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1

I. Outline




5-48

1 6

abcd

Wire connector(4 x 6-pin, male)

D-type connector(44-pins, male)

Coaxial cable

X1X2

X3

X4

X5

Label

Main label

Pos.44


Pos.31

Figure 5–18 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1


Table 5–33 Labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1




5–6E1 X4 The 5th–6th channels of E1 signals


II. Pin assignment


Note:




5-49

Table 5–34 Pin assignment of the75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1


38 a5 Ring

23 a6 Tip 1

15 d4 Ring

30 d3 Tip 2

37 a3 Ring

22 a4 Tip 3

14 d2 Ring

29 d1 Tip 4


36 a5 Ring

21 a6 Tip 5

13 d4 Ring

28 d3 Tip 6

35 a3 Ring

20 a4 Tip 7

12 d2 Ring

27 d1 Tip 8


34 a5 Ring

19 a6 Tip 1

11 d4 Ring

26 d3 Tip 2

33 a3 Ring

18 a4 Tip 3

10 d2 Ring

25 d1 Tip 4



5-50


32 a5 Ring

17 a6 Tip 5

9 d4 Ring

24 d3 Tip 6

31 a3 Ring

16 a4 Tip 7

8 d2 Ring

7 d1 Tip 8


I. Outline



Main label 1 6

abcd


X1 X2

X3

X4

X5

Label

Pos.44


Pos.31

Coaxial cable



Table 5–35 Labels on the120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1

Label Contents Meaning




5-51





II. Pin assignment


Table 5–36 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP1


38 a5

23 a6 Twisted

15 d4

30 d3 Twisted

37 a3

22 a4 Twisted

14 d2

29 d1 Twisted


36 a5

21 a6 Twisted

13 d4

28 d3 Twisted

35 a3

20 a4 Twisted

12 d2

27 d1 Twisted


34 a5

19 a6 Twisted



5-52


11 d4

26 d3 Twisted

33 a3

18 a4 Twisted

10 d2

25 d1 Twisted


32 a5

17 a6 Twisted

9 d4

24 d3 Twisted

31 a3

16 a4 Twisted

8 d2

7 d1 Twisted


I. Outline



Main label

1 6

abcd


X1X2

X3

Label

Coaxial cable




5-53


Table 5–37 Labels on the75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2




II. Pin assignment


Note:




38 a6 Ring

23 b6 Tip 1

15 d6 Ring

30 c6 Tip 2

37 a4 Ring

22 a5 Tip 3

14 d4 Ring

29 d5 Tip 4


36 a2 Ring

21 a3 Tip 5

13 d2 Ring

28 d3 Tip 6

35 b1 Ring 7



5-54


20 a1 Tip

12 c1 Ring

27 d1 Tip 8


34 a6 Ring

19 b6 Tip 1

11 d6 Ring

26 c6 Tip 2

33 a4 Ring

18 a5 Tip 3

10 d4 Ring

25 d5 Tip 4


32 a2 Ring

17 a3 Tip 5

9 d2 Ring

24 d3 Tip 6

31 b1 Ring

16 a1 Tip 7

8 c1 Ring

7 d1 Tip 8


I. Outline




5-55


Main label 1 6

abcd


X1X2

X3

Twisted pair

Pos.44


Pos.31Label

Figure 5–21 Outline of the120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2


Table 5–39 Labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 1000 SS42SP2




II. Pin assignment




38 a6

23 b6 Twisted

15 d6

30 c6 Twisted

37 a4

22 a5 Twisted

14 d4

29 d5 Twisted



5-56


36 a2

21 a3 Twisted

13 d2

28 d3 Twisted

35 b1

20 a1 Twisted

12 c1

24 d1 Twisted


34 a6

19 b6 Twisted

11 d6

26 c6 Twisted

33 a4

18 a5 Twisted

10 d4

25 d5 Twisted

32 a2

17 a3 Twisted

9 d2

24 d3 Twisted

31 b1

16 a1 Twisted

8 c1

7 d1 Twisted

5.2.33 Overview of E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100

The E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100 has two types: 75-ohm and 120-ohm.



5-57

5.2.34 75-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100

I. Outline


Main label

Label

X1

X2

Pos.1Pos.15

Pos.31Pos.16 Pos.30

Pos.44

Pos.1 Pos.15

Pos.31Pos.30Pos.16

Pos.44


Coaxial cable

Figure 5–22 Outline of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100

Table 5–41 describes the labels on this trunk cable.

Table 5–41 Description of the labels on the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 100


PVU8/PVU4 X1 Connector X1 is connected to PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4.

II. Pin assignment


Note:


Table 5–42 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro 100



5-58


38 15 Ring

23 30 Tip 1

37 14 Ring

22 29 Tip 3

36 13 Ring

21 28 Tip 5

35 12 Ring

20 27 Tip 7

15 38 Ring

30 23 Tip 2

14 37 Ring

29 22 Tip 4

13 36 Ring

28 21 Tip 6

12 35 Ring

27 20 Tip 8


34 11 Ring

19 26 Tip 1

33 10 Ring

18 25 Tip 3

32 9 Ring

17 24 Tip 5

31 8 Ring

16 7 Tip 7

11 34 Ring

26 19 Tip 2

10 33 Ring

25 18 Tip 4

9 32 Ring

24 17 Tip 6



5-59


8 31 Ring

7 16 Tip 8

5.2.35 120-ohm E1 Trunk Cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100

I. Outline




Label

Main labelX1

X2

Pos.44


Pos.31

Pos.44


Pos.31

Figure 5–23 Outline of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100


Table 5–43 Description of labels on the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100


PVU8/PVU4 X1 Connector X1 is connected to PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4.

II. Pin assignment


Table 5–44 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable from PVU8/PVU4/RSU8/RSU4 to Metro100



5-60


38 15

23 30 Twisted

37 14

22 29 Twisted

36 13

21 28 Twisted

35 12

20 27 Twisted

15 38

30 23 Twisted

14 37

29 22 Twisted

13 36

28 21 Twisted

12 35

27 20 Twisted


34 11

19 26 Twisted

33 10

18 25 Twisted

32 9

17 24 Twisted

31 8

16 7 Twisted

11 34

26 19 Twisted

10 33

25 18 Twisted

9 32

24 17 Twisted



5-61


8 31

7 16 Twisted

5.3 Overview of Subtending Cable

The rear-access subtending cable of the UA5000 includes the following two types:

HW cable Slave frame LVDS cable

5.3.1 HW Cable

I. Outline

Figure 5–24 shows the outline of the HW cable.

Main label

Twisted pair

Pos.1

Pos.36 Pos.18

Pos.19


Pos.1

Pos.36 Pos.18

Pos.19


Figure 5–24 Outline of the HW cable

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–45 shows the pin assignment of the HW cable.

Table 5–45 Pin assignment of the HW cable

X1 X2 Relationship

1 1

2 2 Twisted

3 3

4 4 Twisted

5 5

6 6 Twisted

7 7

8 8 Twisted



5-62

X1 X2 Relationship

9 9

10 10 Twisted

11 11

12 12 Twisted

13 13

14 14 Twisted

15 15

16 16 Twisted

19 19

20 20 Twisted

21 21

22 22 Twisted

23 23

24 24 Twisted

25 25

26 26 Twisted

29 29

30 30 Twisted

32 32

33 33 Twisted

34 34 -

18 18

36 36 Twisted

5.3.2 LVDS Cable for the Slave Frame

I. Outline

Figure 5–25 shows the outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame.



5-63

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Main label

X1 X2Twisted pair


Figure 5–25 Outline of the LVDS cable for the slave frame

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–46 shows the pin assignment of the LVDS cable for the slave frame.

Table 5–46 Pin assignment of the LVDS cable for the slave frame

X1 X2 Grounded or not Relationship

3 3 Yes

1 1

2 2 No

Twisted

5 5 Yes

6 6

7 7 No

Twisted

9 9 Yes

10 10

11 11 No

Twisted

12 12 Yes

13 13

14 14 No

Twisted

18 18 Yes

19 37

20 38 No

Twisted

24 24 Yes

25 43

26 44 No

Twisted

30 30 Yes

31 50

32 51 No

Twisted



5-64

X1 X2 Grounded or not Relationship

36 36 Yes

37 19

38 20 No

Twisted

42 42 Yes

43 25

44 26 No

Twisted

45 45 Yes

46 46

47 47 No

Twisted

49 49 Yes

50 31

51 32 No

Twisted

55 55 Yes

56 56

57 57 No

Twisted

61 61 Yes

62 62

63 63 No

Twisted

66 66 Yes

67 67

68 68 No

Twisted

40 41

41 40 No Twisted

39 39 Yes NA

5.4 Subscriber Cable

5.4.1 Overview of Subscriber Cable

The rear-access subscriber cable of the UA5000 includes the following types:

16-port subscriber cable 32-port subscriber cable ATIA subscriber cable



5-65

EAUA subscriber cable SDLT subscriber cable

5.4.2 16-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable

I. Outline

Figure 5–26 shows the outline of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable.

X4

X3

X2

X1

Twisted pair


1

8a cb

Figure 5–26 Outline of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable.

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–47 shows the pin assignment of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable.

Note:

"*" and "¦" are the symbols on the cable. "Continuous" after the color means the symbols are continuous.

Table 5–47 Pin assignment of the 16-port unshielded subscriber cable

X1 Tip color Symbol color

a1 Red*

c1 Pink

Black*

a2 Orange Red*



5-66


c2 Black*

a3 Red*

c3 Green

Black*

a4 Red*

c4 Blue

Black*

a5 Red*

c5 Gray

Black*

a6 Red**

c6 Pink

Black**

a7 Red**

c7 Orange

Black**

a8 Red**

c8 Green

Black**


a1 Red**

c1 Blue

Black**

a2 Red**

c2 Gray

Black**

a3 Red***

c3 Pink

Black***

a4 Red***

c4 Orange

Black***

a5 Red***

c5 Green

Black***

a6 Red***

c6 Blue

Black***

a7 Red***

c7 Gray

Black***

a8 Red****

c8 Pink

Black****



5-67


a1 Red****

c1 Orange

Black****

a2 Red****

c2 Green

Black****

a3 Red****

c3 Blue

Black****

a4 Red****

c4 Gray

Black****

a5 Red*(continuous)

c5 Pink

Black*(continuous)

a6 Red*(continuous)

c6 Orange

Black*(continuous)

a7 Red*(continuous)

c7 Green

Black*(continuous)

a8 Red*(continuous)

c8 Blue

Black*(continuous)


a1 Red*(continuous)

c1 Gray

Black*(continuous)

a2 Red ¦

c2 Pink

Black ¦

a3 Red ¦

c3 Orange

Black ¦

a4 Red ¦

c4 Green

Black ¦

a5 Red ¦

c5 Blue

Black ¦

a6 Red ¦

c6 Gray

Black ¦

a7 Red ¦

c7 Pink

Black ¦



5-68


a8 Red ¦

c8 Blue

Black ¦

5.4.3 32-Port Unshielded Subscriber Cable

I. Outline

Figure 5–27 shows the outline of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable.

X1

X2

16

a bc1


Main label

Twisted pair

Figure 5–27 Outline of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable.


Table 5–48 Description of the labels on the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable


UP (1–16) X1 The first 16 subscriber ports, connected to the upper HEADER on the backplane.

DOWN (17–32) X2 The last 16 subscriber ports, connected to the upper HEADER on the backplane.

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–49 shows the pin assignment of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable.



5-69

Note:

"*" and "¦" are the symbols on the cable. "Continuous" after the color means the symbols are continuous.

Table 5–49 Pin assignment of the 32-port unshielded subscriber cable


a1 Red*

c1 Pink

Black*

a2 Red*

c2 Orange

Black*

a3 Red*

c3 Green

Black*

a4 Red*

c4 Blue

Black*

a5 Red*

c5 Gray

Black*

a6 Red**

c6 Pink

Black**

a7 Red**

c7 Orange

Black**

a8 Red**

c8 Green

Black**

b1 Red**

b2 Blue

Black**

b3 Red**

b4 Gray

Black**

b5 Red***

b6 Pink

Black***

b7 Red***

b8 Orange

Black***

b9 Red***

B1 Green

Black***



5-70


b11 Red***

b12 Blue

Black***

b13 Red***

b14 Gray

Black***

b15 Red****

b16 Pink

Black****


b1 Red****

b2 Orange

Black****

b3 Red****

b4 Green

Black****

b5 Red****

b6 Blue

Black****

b7 Red****

b8 Gray

Black****

b9 Red*(continuous)

b10 Pink

Black*(continuous)

b11 Red*(continuous)

b12 Orange

Black*(continuous)


b14 Green

Black*(continuous)


b16 Blue

Black*(continuous)

a9 Red*(continuous)

c9 Gray

Black*(continuous)

a10 Red ¦

c10 Pink

Black ¦

a11 Red ¦

c11 Orange

Black ¦

a12 Red ¦

c12 Green

Black ¦



5-71


a13 Red ¦

c13 Blue

Black ¦

a14 Red ¦

c14 Gray

Black ¦

a15 Red ¦

c15 Pink

Black ¦

a16 Red ¦

c16 Blue

Black ¦

5.4.4 ATIA Subscriber Cable

I. Outline

Figure 5–28 shows the outline of the ATIA subscriber cable.

1

8ac b

X2

X1


Main labelTwisted pair

Figure 5–28 Outline of the ATIA subscriber cable

Table 5–50 describes the labels on the ATIA subscriber cable.

Table 5–50 Description of labels on the ATIA subscriber cable


JP2(1–8) X1 Connected to pin rows 1–8 on the upper header in the cabling area of the corresponding card

JP3(25–32) X2 Connected to pin rows 25–32 on the lower header in the cabling area of the corresponding card



5-72

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–51 shows the pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable.

Table 5–51 Pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber cable

Connector X1 Tip color Tip point color

a1 Red*

a2 Pink

Black*

a3 Red*

a4 Orange

Black*

a5 Red*

a6 Green

Black*

a7 Red*

a8 Blue

Black*


b1 Red**

b2 Pink

Black**

b3 Red**

b4 Orange

Black**

b5 Red**

b6 Green

Black**

b7 Red**

b8 Blue

Black**


c1 Red***

c2 Pink

Black***

c3 Red***

c4 Orange

Black***

c5 Red***

c6 Green

Black***

c7 Red***

c8 Blue

Black***



5-73


a1 Red****

a2 Pink

Black****

a3 Red****

a4 Orange

Black****

a5 Red****

a6 Green

Black****

a7 Red****

a8 Blue

Black****


b1 Red*****

b2 Pink

Black*****

b3 Red*****

b4 Orange

Black*****

b5 Red*****

b6 Green

Black*****

b7 Red*****

b8 Blue

Black*****


c1 Red-

c2 Pink

Black-

c3 Red-

c4 Orange

Black-

c5 Red-

c6 Green

Black-

c7 Red-

c8 Blue

Black-



5-74

5.4.5 EAUA Subscriber Cable

I. Outline

Figure 5–29 shows the outline of the EAUA subscriber cable.

X7

X5X3X1

X8X6X4X2

Network portconnector (8-pin)

Main label

X

81


Pos.68

Pos.1

Pos.34

Pos.35

Figure 5–29 Outline of the EAUA subscriber cable


Table 5–52 Description of the labels on the EAUA subscriber cable

Content Connector Meaning

channel1 X1 The 1st subscriber port

channel2 X2 The 2nd subscriber port

channel3 X3 The 3rd subscriber port

channel4 X4 The 4th subscriber port





II. Pin assignment

Table 5–53 shows the pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable.



5-75

Table 5–53 Pin assignment of the EAUA subscriber cable

X X1 Cable color Relationship

36 1 White

35 2 Black Twisted

38 3 White

37 6 Brown Twisted


40 1 White

39 2 Black Twisted

42 3 White

41 6 Brown Twisted


44 1 White

43 2 Black Twisted

46 3 White

45 6 Brown Twisted


48 1 White

47 2 Black Twisted

50 3 White

49 6 Brown Twisted


20 1 White

19 2 Black Twisted

22 3 White

21 6 Brown Twisted



5-76


24 1 White

23 2 Black Twisted

26 3 White

25 6 Brown Twisted


28 1 White

27 2 Black Twisted

30 3 White

29 6 Brown Twisted


32 1 White

31 2 Black Twisted

34 3 White

33 6 Brown Twisted

5.4.6 Overview of SDLT Subscriber Cable

The SDLT subscriber cable has two types: with four tributaries and with eight tributaries. They are used to connect four and eight SHDSL channels respectively.

5.4.7 Four-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable

I. Outline

Figure 5–30 shows the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.



5-77

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

81Main label

8-pin network portconnector


a1

bc

8

Label

Figure 5–30 Outline of the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable

Table 5–54 describes the labels on the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.

Table 5–54 Description of labels on the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable


RPS SDLT DOWN(17–32) X1

Connector X1 is connected to pin rows 17–32 on the lower header of the backplane.

1#RPS X2 The 1st channel of SHDSL signals.

2#RPS X3 The 2nd channel of SHDSL signals.

3#RPS X4 The 3rd channel of SHDSL signals.

4#RPS X5 The 4th channel of SHDSL signals.

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–55 shows the pin assignment of the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.

Table 5–55 Pin assignment of the four-tributary SDLT subscriber cable


a1 7

c1 8 Twisted

a2 5

c2 6 Twisted


a3 7 Twisted



5-78

c3 8

a4 5

c4 6 Twisted


a5 7

c5 8 Twisted

a6 5

c6 6 Twisted


a7 7

c7 8 Twisted

a8 5

c8 6 Twisted

5.4.8 Eight-tributary SDLT Subscriber Cable

I. Outline

Figure 5–31 shows the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.

X1

X2

X3

X9

81

Main label

8-pin networkport connector


a1

bc

8

Label

Figure 5–31 Outline of the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable

Table 5–56 describes the labels on the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.



5-79

Table 5–56 Description of labels on the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable


RPS SDLT DOWN(17–32) X1

Connector X1 is connected to pin rows 17–32 on the lower header of the backplane.

1#RPS X2 The 1st channel of SHDSL signals.

2#RPS X3 The 2nd channel of SHDSL signals.

3#RPS X4 The 3rd channel of SHDSL signals.






II. Pin assignment

Table 5–57 shows the pin assignment of the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable.

Table 5–57 Pin assignment of the eight-tributary SDLT subscriber cable


a1 7

c1 8 Twisted


a2 7

c2 8 Twisted


a3 7

c3 8 Twisted



5-80


a4 7

c4 8 Twisted


a5 7

c5 8 Twisted


a6 7

c6 8 Twisted


a7 7

c7 8 Twisted


a8 7

c8 8 Twisted

5.5 Maintenance Cable

The rear-access cable of the UA5000 is the same as the front-accessible cable. Refer to "Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables".

5.6 Overview of Signal Cable

The rear-access signal cables of the UA5000 include:

ESC monitoring cable Test and alarm cable Fan monitoring cable



5-81

5.6.1 ESC Monitoring Cable

I. Outline

Figure 5–32shows the outline of the ESC monitoring cable.

Network portconnector (8-pin) Label Main label Twisted pair

8 1

8 1

X1

X2

X3

Figure 5–32 Outline of the ESC monitoring cable

Table 5–58 describes the labels on the ESC monitoring cable.

Table 5–58 Description of the labels on the ESC monitoring cable


JD3/JD4 X1 Connected to JD3 or JD4 on the service frame where the control card resides.

ESC-A X2 Connected to JC1 of the environment monitoring unit.

ESC-B X3 Connected to JC3 of the environment monitoring unit.

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–59 shows the pin assignment of the ESC monitoring cable.

Table 5–59 Pin assignment of the ESC monitoring cable

X1 X2 Cable color

3 7 White

6 6 Blue

7 3 White

X1 X3 Cable color

8 7 White

2 6 Blue

1 3 White



5-82

5.6.2 Test and Alarm Cable

The test and alarm cable adopts the straight through cable.

5.6.3 Fan Monitoring Cable

I. Outline

Figure 5–33 shows the outline of the fan monitoring cable.

Network portconnector (8-pin)

4-pin connector

Label

8 1

X1

Main label

Twisted pairX2

X3

1

4

Figure 5–33 Outline of the fan monitoring cable

Table 5–60 describes the labels on the fan monitoring cable.

Table 5–60 Description of the labels on the fan monitoring cable


Up fan X3 Connected to the fan monitoring interface on the upper frame.

Down fan X2 Connected to the fan monitoring interface on the lower frame.

II. Pin assignment

Table 5–61 shows the pin assignment of the fan monitoring cable.

Table 5–61 Pin assignment of the fan monitoring cable

From… To… Relationship

X1.1 X2.2

X1.2 X2.3 Twisted

X1.3 X3.2

X1.6 X3.3 Twisted

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations


A-1

Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

A

ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line

ASL Analog Subscriber Line Card

ATIA Analog Trunk Interface

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B

BIOS Basic Input/Output System

BRA Basic Rate Access

C

CDI Direct-Dialing-In Subscriber Interface Card

CES Circuit Emulation Service

CLK Clock

CPE Customer Premises Equipment

CPU Central Processing Unit

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

D

DC Direct Current

DCE Data Communications Equipment

DDF Digital Distribution Frame

DDN Digital Data Network

DSL 8-Port Remote Feeding Digital Subscriber Line Card

DTE Data Terminal Equipment

E

ESC Environment & Power Monitoring Card

F

FC Fiber Connector

FE Far End, Fast Ethernet

FSK Frequency Shift Keying

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet



A-2

GND Ground

H

HONET Home Optical Network

HSL High-speed Subscriber Line Card

HW Highway

I

IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM

IP Internet Protocol

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

L

LAN Local Area Network

LE Local Exchange

LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signal

M

MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol

MSTP Multi-Service Transmission Platform

MTA Multifunctional Terminal Adapter

N

NGN Next Generation Network

NMS Network Management System

NOD Node Communication Card

O

ODF Optical Distribution Frame

OLT Optical Line Terminal

ONU Optical Network Unit

P

POTS Plain Old Telephone Service

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

PWX Secondary Power Supply Card

Q

QoS Quality of Service

R

RSP Remote Subscriber Processor



A-3

S

SHDSL Single-pair High Rate Digital Subscriber Line

SPC Semi-Permanent Connection

STM-1 Synchronous Transport Module-1

STM-4 Synchronous Transport Module-4

STP Shielded Twisted Pair

STU SHDSL Transceiver Unit

T

TDM Time Division Multiplexing

TSSB Test Card

U

UNI User Network Interface

UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair

V

VDSL Very High Speed DSL

VFB Voice Frequency Card

VoIP Voice over IP

VP Virtual Path

X

xDSL x Digital Subscriber Line

Hardware Description Manual UA5000 Universal Access Unit Index


1

Index

Numerics 120-ohm matching impedance, 3-22, 3-28, 3-34,

3-40, 3-54, 3-112, 4-17, 4-46, 5-10, 5-29, 5-47

16-channel unshielded subscriber cable, 4-53

32-channel unshielded subscriber cable, 4-55

75-ohm matching impedance, 3-22, 3-28, 3-34,

3-40, 3-54, 3-112, 4-17, 4-46, 5-10, 5-29, 5-47

A ADSL line card, 3-56

H601ADLB, 3-56

H601ADLF, 3-59

AG03PVM/AG03PVMCF/AG03PVMCB, 3-18

analog line card, 3-78

CB36ASL/CB37ASL, 3-72

CB38ASL, 3-75

CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL, 3-78

CC0KASL/CC0MASL, 3-81

C CB01VMS, 3-155

CB02DSL/CB03DSL, 3-114

CB02VFB, 3-147

CB03VFB, 3-151

CB05DSL, 3-117

conversion card, 3-194

H601SLTF, 3-203

D digital trunk cable, 4-1

DTE, 4-64

E EAUA subscriber cable, 4-61

environment & power monitoring card, 3-158

H303ESC, 3-158

H304ESC, 3-161

F F01A, 1-2

F01AF, 1-2

F01D100, 1-2

F01D1000, 1-2

F01D200, 1-2

F01D500, 1-2

F02A, 1-2

F02AF, 1-2

FC/PC optical connector, 4-73

fiber selection criteria, 4-72

front access, 1-2

H H301CDI/CC01CDI, 3-90

H302HSL, 3-123

H521SDL, 3-132

H601ADRB, 3-68

H601AIUB, 3-45

H601APMB, 3-1

H601APSB, 3-11

H601ATIA, 3-84

H601CSLB, 3-93

H601CSLI, 3-96

H601DEHA, 3-109

H601E1TB, 3-181

H601E1TF, 3-184

H601EAUA, 3-120

H601EDTB, 3-50

H601EFTB, 3-185

H601EFTF, 3-188

H601FCB, 3-164

H601HLAF, 3-190

H601HLEF, 3-191

H601HLSF, 3-192



2

H601HWCB, 3-192

H601HWCF, 3-194

H601HWTB, 3-195

H601HWTF, 3-196

H601IPMB, 3-13

H601PVMB/H601PVMBB/H601PVMBF/H601PV

MBG, 3-23

H601PVU8/H601PVU4, 3-29

H601RATB, 3-197

H601RATF, 3-200

H601RSU8/H601RSU4, 3-35

H601SDLB, 3-138

H601SDLT, 3-140

H601TSSB/H601TSSC, 3-175

H601VDLA, 3-143

H601VDLB, 3-145

H602ADMB/H602ADMC/H602ADMI, 3-62

H602CSMB, 3-99

H602RSUG, 3-41

H603ADRB, 3-64

H603CSMB/H603CSMC, 3-102

H603CSRB, 3-106

HABA

external port, 2-3

layout, 2-1

power supply port, 2-4

HABA frame, 2-1

HABB

external port, 2-6

layout, 2-5


HABB frame, 2-4

HABD

external port, 2-9

layout, 2-8


HABD frame, 2-7

HABE

external port, 2-13

layout, 2-12


HABE frame, 2-12

HABF

external port, 2-16

layout, 2-15


HABF frame, 2-15

HABL

external port, 2-20

layout, 2-19


HABL frame, 2-18

high speed line card, 3-123

H303HSL, 3-127

HW cable, 4-47

L LC/PC optical connector, 4-73

LVDS cable

extended frame, 4-50

slave frame, 4-48

M MTRJ optical connector, 4-73

N network cable, 4-64

O optical fiber, 4-70

optical fiber types, 4-70

optical port connectors, 4-73

R rear access, 1-2

S SC/PC optical connector, 4-73

secondary power supply card, 3-168

H602PWX0, 3-168

H602PWX2, 3-171

signal cable, 4-66

ST/PC optical connector, 4-73

subscriber cable, 4-53



3

subtending cable, 4-47

T test and alarm cable, 4-66

test and alarm subtending cable, 4-69

U UA5000 series, 1-1

UA5000 Hardware Description Manual

Documents

external port

haba frame

habb frame

habd frame

habe frame

habf frame

habl frame

service frames